Home

MELSEC-Q/L Ethernet Interface Module User`s Manual (Application)

Contents

1. X20 A mov H81 DO y With arrival confirmation clock data setting required Control data setting command mov K6 D2 J Channel used by local station mov HO D3 Target station s CPU type Control CPU Mov K20 D4 Target station network number Mov K3 D5 Y Target station number Mov K20 D8 Arrival monitoring time 20 s mov K4 D9 Y Write data length 4 words x21 7 I mov K10 D300 Write data setting command THOV K20 D301 gt Write data mov K30 D302 mov K40 D303 X22 X59 _ J 1 mov K5 D7 Y Number of resend Write d A a i FENTER L PSE J20 Do D300 D50 M60 moo X59 Initial normal completion signal m60 DERE A OS 1 Processing program on write completion N61 OA eee eee cr ran YH Processing program on normal completion fe ee ee Re tt ta ets ie ll M61 1 Processing program on abnormal completion i Performs error code reading etc i mov D1 Dop i I 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 7 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations ZNRD ZNWR This section explains the format and program examples of the ZNRD ZNWR instructions that are used to read and write data of word devices of other station For details see Sections 6 13 and 6 14 1 Instruction format a ZNRD instruction Network number designation Read command JOE ti Execut
2. AN External device Ethernet module External device 1 E mails can be sent and received in an environment where the Internet service is available as shown above 2 Set each Internet mail setting value for the Ethernet module and PC following the directions from the Internet service provider or system administrator 3 Use a programming tool to set each parameter for use of the e mail function in an Ethernet module 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 3 Precautions for Using the E mail Function The following explains precautions when using the e mail function of the Ethernet module 1 Precautions regarding the system 2 a b Design the system so that the entire system operates normally at all times when sending receiving e mails to from a running system and controlling the programmable controller In order to avoid programmable controller system malfunctions caused by receptions of illegal e mails from the outside sources take precautions in preventing illegal e mails from being received on the mail served on the Ethernet module side using an anti virus program etc Precautions regarding the external device a E mails can be sent to programmable controller CPU stations with Q series Ethernet modules connected Note that A QnA series Ethernet modules do not have the e mail function therefore e mails cannot be sent to programmable controller CPU stations To s
3. Completion of send of When the instruction is executed using J SREAD G SREAD the next read processing is executed in succession after one read processing is completed while the read command is on When the instruction is executed using JP SREAD GP SREAD the read processing is executed only once when the read command switches from off to on at rise When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFuHorless_ User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000 or higher User s Manual Basic See the program example of the READ instruction described in Section 6 4 The SREAD instruction only differs from the READ instruction on one point namely that the read notification device D3 is designated at the end of arguments 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 11 JP GP SWRITE This instruction writes data to word devices of other stations Applicable device Set Link direct device Intelligent Internal device f Index register Constant data File register JO function module H Others Zn K device VENGO sy o sa o ca o e o D3 x1 T C D W ST SD or SW can be used For SD SW data can be written with
4. Network module Ethernet module start I O signal designation Execution command GE ti Execution a G REQ S1 S2 01 D2 daha ah Execution command GP E ti Execution GP REQ S1 82 D1 D2 during startup 1 to 239 Network number 254 Network designated in a valid module for other n Local station network number station access Start I O signal of the local station network module Ethernet module O to FE n Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is ee expressed by three digits Control data storage head device S1 Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device 5 the control data D2 Request data storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the request data Response data storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device 2 the response data Execution completion device local station Designate the device of the local station to t esignate the device of the local station to turn on one Bit device 1 scan when the execution is complete w iia P Word device bit designation 3 OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Abnormal HA Bit device ostras X Y M L F V B 2 Word device a Tr C D W ST R ZR 3 Word device bit designation Word device Bit number 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRA
5. c cccecseeeeeeeeeeees 3 9 Net mask pattern ccceecceeeeeeeteeeeteeteteeees 3 6 News data points cceecceeseeeeeteeeseees 2 36 D News data storage device oooocoiciccic 2 36 Data link instructions s s 4 8 News Setting eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeereeas 2 32 DNS 2 ic TA eae 2 11 News Specification ccccccceeceeeeeeeeetees 2 14 Drive name ceeccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeetees 5 16 P E Password E mail sending attached file 2 15 EN oia aran 2 12 E mail sending main text eee 2 28 PP no 5 5 5 16 E mail SettiQ oonooniinnnnininnnnnninnonnconnccnacnncnnnns 2 12 PLC inquiry interval 2 34 E mail sending and receiving 2 1 PLC monitoring timer a an 5 6 Error code POPS Seven cunda 2 8 2 13 Data link instructions ooonooninnnnnconinn 4 42 Response code FTP 5 20 Index 1 Index 1 R READ data link instruction 4 23 6 13 Receive E mail oococccinncnncinnnniirnireirnenrs 2 20 Receive mail Setting 0 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeseeeeteeees 2 12 Receiving a NEWS e mail 2 37 RECV data link instruction 4 13 6 19 RECVS data link instruction 4 19 6 24 Relay network NO c ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 3 15 Relay station No cceeceseeseeseeeeeeeeeeenreees 3 15 Remote RUN Remote STOP programmable controller CPU ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeteteeetteeeeeees
6. O Can be designation X Cannot be designated x1 For the external device that completed the communication the station can be a communication request source station or a relay sending station Communication request source station CPU E71 Ethernet Communication relay receiving station Communication relay sending station Communication relay station The automatic response 222 Ethernet system can be set po Sa ee ita 4 ee E _ Communication request destination station 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 3 3 Routing parameter settings The routing parameters contain information of the Ethernet modules passed through when accessing other stations This section explains the routing parameters that must be set in order to access other stations via the Ethernet module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function Open the Routing Information screen under the network parameter screen of a programming tool Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet CC IE mfx Relay Station No Clear Check End Cancel Routing information setting Set the Network No of the Ethernet or CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 to which the communication request destination station or the Target Network No am one i oy 1 to 239 communication request
7. Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent by the number of resends 20ms x 2 200ms x 3 30ms 670ms 1 Since the arrival monitoring time value may be rounded off add 100ms Using the default for Ethernet module parameter setting 1s for arrival monitoring time unit Setting target Setting value Processing time Sequence scan time of the CPU module St Communication Setting unit of arrival monitoring time In increments of 1s request source Control data for the data link bit 8 of S1 0 0 station instruction Arrival monitoring time 0 Number of resends 3 Communication request destination Response time of the CPU module Rt station Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent by the number of resends 20ms x 2 10s x 3 30ms 30 078 1 Since the arrival monitoring time value default 0 is smaller than the TCP resend timer value default 10s the processing time will be the same as the TCP resend timer App 5 App 5 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L 2 Executing the READ instruction using 3 channels and monitoring devices with a programming tool podo 0000 0000 podo 0000 0000 Communication request destination station _ Communication request Communication request source station source station Device monitor 3 channels used
8. i Status PAUSE Status STOP Serious Fatal Error or Status STOP Abnormal 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 When monitoring a device x1 a b When any of the results of the device monitoring matches the monitoring condition among the devices having the conditions designated on the news setting screen the Subject and attached file or the Subject and main text will be sent The following shows the contents for the Subject sent conato match device Le for condition mached value monitoring value Condition match device No of transmissions 1 No kek ek Ma All device values for the number of registered points designated on the news setting screen are recorded in the attached file or main text The size of the data recorded in the attached file or main text is calculated as follows Information of bit devices Reqistered points number of bits 16 x 2 bytes Round up to a whole number Information of word devices Registered points number of devices x 2 bytes This is the number automatically added each time an Ethernet module sends an e mail The numbers are counted up from 1 When the number reaches 4294967296 the number is cleared to 0 Then the numbers are counted up from 0 again to 4294967296 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L d The contents of the data recorded are as follows 1 When sending data as an attached file If the data format is bina
9. E JJ Programming tool a Calculating arrival monitoring time Apply the following values for sequence scan time of the CPU module on the communication request source station St and response time of the CPU module on the communication request destination station Rt St 20ms Rt 30ms x 4 scans 120ms Since the READ instruction is used communication processing time between the Ethernet modules on the communication request source station and on the communication request destination station Dt will be the following value Dt 9 9ms Set a value larger than the following to the arrival monitoring time St x 2 Dt Rt 20 x 2 9 9 120 169 9ms In this processing the READ instruction is executed using 3 channels and device monitor is performed Therefore the maximum 4 scans may be required 30ms x 4 scans 120ms However the processing can be performed in one scan by the following setting 30ms x 1 scan 30ms e Service processing setting Universal model QCPU LCPU Time reserved for communication processing SD315 other than the Universal model QCPU LCPU Example Arrival monitoring time when service processing is set to 4 times St x 2 Dt Rt 20 x 2 9 9 30 79 9ms For details on the setting refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the
10. The next receive mail Execute only e mail read processing A o cannot be read ae The inquiry read processing of the Inquiries to the mail i Do nat inquire o i f nee immediately remaining receive mail information is server can be less l Do not read Mails tend to executed after the time set with a frequent accumulate on the parameter of a programming tool mail server A Inquiries to the mail Execute read processing of e mails server become more After executing the MRECV Mails received by the f t requent instruction the inquiry read mail server can be 4 T f A s More processing in the processing of the remaining receive read in succession T B module affects other mail information is also executed E internal processing 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 4 Sending an e mail from a personal computer This section explains how to send e mails from a PC UNIX to the Ethernet module After setting the environment where the Internet is accessible with a mail user agent create and send an e mail on the sending message creation screen as follows To send an e mail to an Ethernet module use a mail user agent where the encoding method Base 64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of attached files can be specified e New Message CIF i Send To Mail address of Ethernet module a Subject TESTMAIL eee b Attac
11. eeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeetees 5 6 Broadcast Simultaneous broadcast 4 5 FTP operation command cceceeeees 5 21 FTP parameter cccccceeeceeeeceeeeteeteeeeeeteeees 5 5 C CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field 1 Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay Inquiry time intervals for checking communication FUNCTION s 3 1 CA 2 13 Check receive Mail 2 13 IP address computation systeM 3 10 Command input monitoring timer 5 6 Command list M Ethernet module dedicated commanas 5 2 Monitor function of the programmable FTP server dedicated commanas 5 3 controller CPU oococncciniciniconicocinoncnrnnarinaranancnnns 2 3 Commands supported by Ethernet module 5 2 Monitoring value 2 36 Communication procedure MRECV instruction for e mail 2 20 6 3 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field MSEND instruction for attached file e mail Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 hae eeeeecececeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeneeeeeteeeeeneseneteneeeneeeaes 2 15 6 8 relay COMMUNICATION eee eee eeeeeete teats 3 21 MSEND instruction for main text e mail PUP uan 57A aaa 2 28 6 8 Processing procedure of the e mail 2 9 Condition deviSe ooocccnoninnnincnonncceos 2 35 N Condition for PLC inspection 006 2 33 Name of attached file ooooooonncnnncnin c 2 18 Conversion method
12. 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 4 JP GP READ This instruction reads data from word devices of other stations Applicable device Set Link direct device Intelligent Internal device i Constant a File register JOO function module Index register Zn device UM GO K H O x1 T C D W ST SD or SW can be used Instruction Executing symbol condition gt Command JP READ Jn S1 JP READ GP READ GP READ Un S1 S2 D1 D2 E The following format can be used only when the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU Instruction Executing symbol condition r Command JP READ S1 S2 D1 D2 ees st sz 01 2 H GP READ GP READ S1 S27 D1 D2 Set data Set data Set by Data type Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Start 1 O signal of the local station s Ethernet module e e Character Character sting 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of a 3 digit I O signal Head device of the local station that stores control data Head device of the target station from which data is read Sse Device name D1 Head device of the local station that stores data read Local station device that i
13. When the target station is on other network Completed when the data arrives at the relay station on the network of the local station o Complete Execution source Relay station Target station O 1 With arrival confirmation Execution abnormal Completed when data is written to the target complete type station y Complete 1 Target station Execution source Relay station Target station i Complete O 2 Abnormal complete type bit 7 Designate whether the clock data setting is required or not at abnormal completion 0 Clock data setting not required Clock data at error occurrence is not stored in S1 11 to S1 17 1 Clock data setting required Clock data at error occurrence is stored in S1 11 to S1 17 3 Arrival monitoring time unit bit 8 Set a unit for arrival monitoring time Set the arrival monitoring time to S1 8 0 Increments of 1s 1 Increments of 100ms Stores the status at the completion of the instruction S1 1 Completion status 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal error code 3 Set the channel used by the local station station 1 to 8 channel Specify the programmable controller CPU of the access destination in the target station Control CPU The access destination is the same as that with O3FFH 00004 S1 3 Target station s CPU type selected 03D0 to 4 0303 03D1H Stan
14. 1 4 Targetstation network No 254 When 254 is designated in Jn The network designated by the valid 1 to 239 254 User module during other station access Designate the target station 3 When the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 120 S1 5 Target station number When the local station is not a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 1to 120 User 64 Gyre SS Fixed va 0 _User _ 1 At instruction execution Set the number of resends when the instruction is not completed within the monitoring time designated by S1 8 U s1 7 Number of resends 0 to 15 times 0to 15 eee i 3 h ystem 2 At instruction completion Store the number of resends executed result 0 to 15 times If processing When setting 1s to S1 O arrival monitoring time unit is notended Set a value greater than or equal to the TCP resend timer within the value for the monitoring time up to instruction processing monitoring termination 0 to 16383 time the 0 to TCP resend timer value Monitoring is performed by S1 8 Arrival monitoring time instruction is the time set to the TCP resend timer User resent by the TCP resend timer value 1 to 16383 Monitoring time number of unit Second SENTI When setting 100ms to S1 0 arrival monitoring time unit 1 to 65535 i 1 to 65535 Monitoring time unit 0 1 seconds Designate the number of data to be read S1 9 Read data length When reading from Q LCPU 1 to
15. 5 Local station IP Address 7 9 2 3 8 0 2 O ee ees 4 BP a ee ATEN EA E a A l Net Mask Pattern Logical product F F 0 0o 0 0o 0 0 E O AA 3 A O n Logical product value i 7 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 r 5 Network No and station No Logical sum 0 3 0 5 es yet See ae as 4 A ee EE Partner station IP Address 7 9 0 0 0 3 0 5 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS a pi E P Local station IP Address 8 4 3 amp E A 0 A hemo este js a ee 4 A E E Net Mask Pattern Logical product F F 4 F F AO 0 amp 0 0 SAA ee A E E eatin cess 2 Logical product value 8 4 3 8 0 0 0 0 ee aN jo A 3 A A A ee y i Network No and station No Logical sum 0 3 0 5 e a eai ea 4 Seta Aaa E z Partner station IP Address 8 4 3 8 0 3 0 5 Boil SA 4 A eyepiece fe k Network No and station No Logical sum 0 2 AA BE ej MELSEC Q L For class B e When the local station IP Address is 8438F AQA e When the Net Mask Pattern for routing other networks is FFFFOO000H e When the destination Network No is 03H and station number is O5H For class C e When the local station IP Address is CA65300AH e When the Net Mask Pattern for routing other networks is FFFFFFOOH e When the destination Network No is 02H The Network number is not used Local station IP Address C A 6 5 3 o 0 A e Net Mask Pattern O Logical product F F F F F F 0 0 Logical product val
16. Ethernet Data can be written to stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the designated numbers in addition to stations connected to the local station s network The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction 4 Whether the WRITE instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the WRITE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the WRITE instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the WRITE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the WRITE instruction is being executed Sequence program WRITE instruction Send receive direction
17. 1 This instruction reads the designated word device data of the station designated Local station Programmable controller CPU with the target station network number and target station number in the control data The station must be connected to other networks or Ethernet When reading the device data from other stations is completed the completion device designated in D2 turns on Also when sending the device data designated in S2 is completed the device on other stations designated in D3 turns on Response station Programmable Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module D1 4 Channel 1 S2 SREAD Channel n Channel 8 Ethernet Device data can be read from stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the specified numbers in addition to stations connected to the local station s network The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction Whether the SREAD instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the send receive instruction flag corresponding to
18. Local station Another station pi cessing anotner station CPU Ethernet K CPU Ethernet module module Ethernet E E i Another station Accessing Router anolher CPU Network Ethernet i station module module Ethernet Another station iz CC Link IE Controller Network i CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H Ethernet i MELSECNET 10 module Another station Accessing another station Network module 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 2 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations The following describes precautions when accessing other stations via the Ethernet module using the data link instructions 1 Executing multiple instructions at one time common to the data link instructions a When simultaneously accessing multiple other stations from the own station change the channel setting of the own station for each request target Station No 3 Station No 1 Own station Other station Channel 1 Write to station No 1 Channel 1 gt Channel 2 Read from station No 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Write to station No 2 Channel 3 Station No 2 4 Channel 4 Read from station No 2 Channel 4 lt station b When accessing other stations using the same channel number access the next station after the last access to other station is completed The completion status can be checked by the completion device of th
19. S1 Head device of the local station that stores the control data User User system S2 Head device of the local station that stores data to be written Med Device name D1 Head device of the target station to which data is written Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of the D2 instruction D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally System Bit Device of the target station that is turned on for one scan by the completion of the instruction Write notification device 4 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data 1 The SWRITE instruction can be executed only when the target station is a Q L QnACPU The SWRITE instruction cannot be executed for an ACPU connected to the MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet network system Therefore the target station number should be the station numbers of Q L QnACPU When writing data from the other station CPU module device with the SWRITE instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be write in other station CPU module D1 number of write points 1 lt last device number of host station
20. 1 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 1 Send using the sequence program The following explains how an e mail is sent using the sequence program See Chapter 6 MSEND for detail Direction Create control data at D20 and on Create send data at D200 and on Send the e mail ZP MSEND vor D20 D200 M10 Processing program when normal completion Processing program when abnormal completion M10 M11 M11 2 Execution timing of the instruction Initial processing E mail sending Initial normal completion signal A X19 MSEND instruction MSEND instruction completion device oe i iz Abnormal completion MSEND instruction completion device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion 1 Start the local station programmable controller The parameters for the e mail function are stored in the Ethernet module 2 Execute the MSEND instruction The e mail designated with the MSEND instruction is sent to the mail server 3 When the e mail sending to the send mail server is completed the MSEND instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns on the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 For details on the causes of errors see the User s Manual Basic 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION 3 Sample program MELSEC Q L The follow
21. 1 Clock data setting required The clock data at error occurrence is set in S 11 to S 15 2 Execution type bit 9 3 Designate whether or not to inquire if there are more mails on the server after reading receive mails 0 Do not inquire Do not read the receive mail information 1 Inquire Read the receive mail information Store the status at completion of the instruction S 1 Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code Designate the mail number to be read when multiple mails are received S 2 Mail ber to b d 0 or high U S ail number to be rea 0 Head mail or higher ser System area At instruction execution Receive data length At instruction completion At instruction execution At instruction completion Clock set flag Clock data set only when abnormal 1 or higher Designated mail Designate the data length header attached file of the e mail that can be stored in D1 O to D1 n header 1 to 373 attached file 1 to 6144 0 to 6517 0 Adjust to the data length of the received e mail Words 1 to 6517 The number of data that can be stored in D1 to D1 n This stores the data length header attached file of the e mail stored in D1 0 to D1 n 1 to 6517 The number of received data stored in D1 0 to D1 n Designate the data length of the mail s header that can be stored in D1 0 to D1 n pr en O to 373 0 Adjust t
22. MELSEC Q L 1 The receive data storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area equal to or greater than the receive data length S 9 maximum of 960 words 2 Execute the RECV instruction every time the corresponding channel s bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 of the buffer memory turns on there is receive data 3 When the Ethernet modules on the same network are installed at the receive station execute RECV instruction by specifying Un of the Ethernet module which stores the data sent by SEND instruction When the RECV instruction is executed with Jn specified a programmable controller CPU executes the RECV instruction to a module having the smallest start I O No Example Specify U2 when executing the RECV instruction at station No 3 in response to the SEND instruction from station No 1 Network No 1 Oo Send station Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet module module module HH senn H Station Station Staton H RECvu2 No 1 No 2 No 3 Receive station 1 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 2 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic 3 Nothing is stored if the execution source detects an error when receiving an instruction The allowable receive data length S
23. S1 17 a detection station number is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 120 Station number 1 The data read storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area equal to or greater than the length of the data read S 9 maximum of 960 words 2 The number of resends S1 7 must be set at every instruction execution 1 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 2 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic 3 It can be specified when the local station has an Ethernet module of function version D or later Not available in any other case Access to the control CPU is required x4 Nothing is stored if the execution source detects an error when receiving an instruction 5 When the READ instruction is executed to the redundant system with a control system or standby system CPU specified the instruction may be unsuccessfully completed due to system switching occurred on the target station error code 4244nH 42484 If this has occurred execute the READ instruction again 6 When data of more than 480 words is specified a CO84H error occurs on the local station Check the read data length 1 to 480 words and execute the READ instruction x7 For how to determine the settin
24. dicated instructions MSEND MRECV available for the Ethernet module 2 7 1 When sending data as an attached file The following explains the MSEND instruction and program for sending e mail The following illustration shows how the MSEND instruction is used to store data in an attached file and send it to an external device 1 2 3 4 LI ZP MSEND Un S1 S2 D QJ71 77777 Mail server Subject attached file Mail address Parameter setting nation 5 Main text of mail 1 O No E71 6 Attached file bin asc csv 1 O number of the Ethernet module Control data such as send mail address This indicates the mail address of the send destination device set on the send mail address settings screen Send mail subject attached file Subject consists of No of transmissions and the character data designated by the sequence program It is not converted to ASCII format The Subject should be designated in the sequence program in ASCII characters Complete bit Main text of mail There is no data for the main text of mail The send data is included in the attached file Attached file This indicates the device data designated by the MSEND instruction The attached file is sent in either one of binary format ASCII format or CSV format The transmission format for attached file is designated in the control data of the MSEND instruction See 3
25. 6 7 O Accessible X Not accessible A Accessible The number of access points etc is restricted 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 1 When performing a remote access from 1 to 2 Setting item Station that does e not e aa acl pone O EC E E E E Routing information setting information setting AH O Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay x x x x x x x parameter 2 When performing a remote access from 1 to 3 Setting item Station that does a not E IE A CS T E E E E E Routing information setting information seting Satara Ss pote fete l ep IP information eal Ae ERD oo parameter 3 When performing a remote access from 1 to 5 Setting item Station that does does not x require setting 2 3 4 5 6 a Pe fee Te te o Routing information setting information setting Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay x x x x x x x parameter 4 When performing a remote access from 1 to 6 Setting item Station that does ra not r ai D COC fe Tete E AER Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt ODA IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay parameter a 1 This setting is required to access the programmable controllers 1 to 5 from the device 6 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 5 When performing a re
26. A A oh I Ethernet 0 bss 1 module l a aa aaa ee ee ee ee ee A HiHrecvsH Interrupt program IRET programmable controller CPU 1 scan completion Receive data storage 2 y device Device specified with D1 Receiving side Sequence scan ENDH o END END O END o END 1 Receive data 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b When abnormal completion 1 SEND instruction cin g aa na ge ra A A oe Myer gag tre g SEND Sequence scan 0 END 30 END 0 END 0 ENDHj 0 END l il 1 Send command k 1 1 1 1 Sending side y i 1 1 i 1 i l i 1 i 1 i 1 l 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 programmable Send completion device i i 1 i l i 1 1 l 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 i 1 1 controller CPU Device specified with D 1 0 Send completion device OFF gt D 1 device 1scan i e a Completion status S1 1 device l Ethernet Channel 1 module AAA WE Aa oe a eh Se A a A A a AAA O IN J Data Data Data sending sending sending Send error Resend aigi designated for twice 2 RECVS instruction E N A ee ee ee ee eee eee Ethernet module La a ts es eras eo a a ede es Ses eR ee A a ee es ees a eS ES thas oe tne a A ae interrupt prog
27. CR LF D24 D25 D26 CR LF e 8 device 8 word unit b Arrangement of data sent using the news function 1 In addition to the data conversion and insertion of comma data described above CR code ODH and LF code OAH are inserted for each setting device range 2 Amaximum of 16 types of device ranges can be set for news data See Section 2 9 for details 3 The arrangement of data sent in CSV format is shown below Qu a Je PS CRLF First device 0 g A D1 g N Second device DO Third device MO to M15 M16 to M31 CR LF i X20 to x2F xo to xo EEEE ae ete eee tere X70 to X7F CR LF n device B10 to B1F B20 to B2F B30 to B3F B60 to BOF CR LF Data section can have a maximum of 1920 bytes total points for the device X10 to X1F n 1 device E 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 8 Sending E mail Main Text by the Programmable Controller CPU This section explains how to send the main text of e mail using the dedicated MSEND instruction available for the Ethernet module 2 8 1 When sending data as main text of e mail The following explains the MSEND instruction and program for sending e mail The following illustration shows how the MSEND instruction is used to store data in the main text of e mail and send it to an external device 1 2 3 4 H ZP MSEND Un S1 S2 D QCPU ET
28. Local station Submaster station 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION Instruction Details Reads data from another station s word device Ethernet module N W module Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module Programmable N W module controller CPU See Section 4 7 Writes data to another station s word F 2 device Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module Ethernet module Programmable N W module N W module controller CPU Channel 2 See Section 4 7 Instruction execution station Local station Target station MELSEC Q L Station type Ethernet Ethernet module Station type Ethernet Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station 5 Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Controller Network Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode Ethernet Ethernet m
29. MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function are set on this screen Set these values by seeing Section 3 3 1 Routing information setting 1 On this screen the routing parameters between Ethernet modules for accessing other stations on other networks are set in the same way as for the routing parameter settings of other networks The Network No and station number of the first communication relay station as seen from the local station are set These settings are required for a station where two or more Ethernet modules or network modules are connected Set these values by seeing Section 3 3 3 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS 3 3 1 Setting the Station No lt gt IP information MELSEC Q L This section explains the Station No lt gt IP information settings that are required to access other stations via the Ethernet module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function In the network parameter screen of a programming tool start the Station No lt gt IP Information screen Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet Station No lt ax Station No lt gt IP Information System Automatic Response System v Net Mask Pattern TE Conversion Setting Input Format DEC v 7 Network No Station No IP Address a Clear Check End Cancel Setting the Station No lt gt IP information D
30. SW R ZR 4 Word device bit designation Word device Bit number b WRITE SWRITE instructions Network number designation Write command JEE 4 Execution AE WRITE S1 82 D1 D2 during startup Write command JP E i Execution JP SWRITE Jn S1 S2 D1 D2 D3 during startup 4 D Network module Ethernet module start I O signal designation Write command GP Execution y GP WRITE Un S1 S2 D1 D2 during startup Write command GP Execution _ 6n s2 Ten a os H siting startup 4 2 K1 The SWRITE instruction can be programmed without argument D3 However in such a case the operation is identical to the WRITE instruction With the SWRITE instruction different operations are available depending on whether D3 is omitted or not gt 2 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU the write notification device set as argument D3 for the target station is ignored Same operation as with the WRITE instruction 4 24 4 24 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L D Settingetais Settingrange 1 to 239 Network number 254 Network designated in a valid module for other station access Start I O signal of the local station network module Ethernet module Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is expressed 0 to FE
31. This instruction reads n2 points of data from the word device of the connected station having the network number designated by Jn n1 in the Ethernet network system When reading the device data is completed the completion device designated in D2 turns on Response station Programmable Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module S Channel 1 Fixed 3 Ethernet The ZNRD instruction is executed using channel 1 fixed The data link instructions and the Ethernet instructions cannot be executed from two or more stations at the same time on the same channel If the conditions of more than one instruction to be executed match at the same time the instruction executed later is made to wait until the channel becomes available since handshaking is performed automatically Whether the ZNRD instruction is currently being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ZNRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ZNRD instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where
32. bit 7 Set whether or not the clock data setting is required at abnormal completion 00004 Abnormal complete type 0 Clock data setting is not required User Clock data is not stored in S 11 to S 17 when 00804 errors occur 1 Clock data setting is required Clock data is stored in S 11 to S 17 when errors occur Store the status at completion of an instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code 2 Specify the channel of the own station where receive data are S 2 Local station storage channel stored 1to8 User o 8 Channel a the channel number used by the transmission station sm transmission station o 8 Channel A a number o 239 Network No Stores the station number of the transmission station S 5 Transmission station number o 120 Station number reception from the station with the System corresponding station number S 6 Not used SSR EE the monitoring time until the instruction completion so that it is greater than or equal to the TCP resend timer value When the instruction fails to complete within the monitoring time te abnormal completion occurs 0 to 16383 Arrival monitoring time 0 to TCP resend timer value User The monitoring time is reset to the TCP resend timer value TCP resend timer value 1 to 16383 Monitoring time unit s Stores the word count of the receive data stored in D1 0 to S 9 Recep
33. by three digits 2 Local station network number Control data storage head device Designate the head device of the local station that stores the Word device control data Write data storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station that stores the data Word device 2 to write Write data storage head device target station Designate the head device of the local station where the data is Word device 2 written Write completion device local station Designate the device of the local station to turn on one scan when the write is complete OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Abnormal Write notify device target station Designate the device of the target station to turn on one scan D3 when the write is complete Can recognize data of target station has been write from other station OFF Incomplete Bit device Word device bit designation Bit device 1 Word device bit designation 4 ON Complete PE EE X Y M L F V B EEE T C D W ST R ZR AEAEE EE a T C D W ST SD SW R ZR For SD SW data can be written within the setting range allowed for the user For details on SD SW refer to the manual for the programmable controller CPU or NW module of the target station po ey pie emea 1 1 ia 4 Word device bit designation Mor device Bit number 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA
34. c 2 5 6 4 2 Section 6 5 Additional model QJ71E71 B5 Deleted model QJ71E71 Correction SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 2 Section 2 6 POINT 2 7 2 8 2 9 Section 3 2 1 2 3 3 Section 4 2 1 4 6 1 Section 5 6 4 Section 6 2 6 3 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 10 POINT 6 11 POINT 6 12 6 13 6 14 Dec 2003 SH NA 080010 F Jun 2004 SH NA 080010 G Correction Section 6 13 POINT 6 14 POINT Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 1 Section 3 2 1 2 Section 4 6 4 8 Section 5 5 5 6 Section 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 11 6 12 x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Aug 2005 SH NA 080010 H C orrection SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 2 7 2 8 2 9 Section 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 9 6 12 Jun 2006 SH NA 080010 I C 7 orrection Section 4 2 4 7 Section 6 4 6 7 6 10 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 Addition Section 6 1 Jun 2007 SH NA 080010 J Change of a term PLC was changed to programmable controller Correction About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 2 Section 3 2 1 3 3 3 Section 4 2 4 4 4 5 2 Section 6 2 to 6 14 Nov 2007 SH NA 080010 K l Correction orrection Section 6 1 Oct 2008 SH NA 080010 L Correction SAFET
35. is executed in succession after one processing is completed while the send receive instruction flag is on When the instruction is executed using JP REQ GP REQ the processing is executed only once when the send receive instruction flag switches from off to on at rise 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4AFFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic Program example The following example shows a program that executes remote STOP on the Q L QnACPU of station number 13 in network number 7 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 mi wov H91 DO J Clock data setting required Control data setting command MOV KI 2 Channel used by the local station MOV H3FF 3 Target station s CPU type Control CPU Mov K7 4 Target station network number Nov K13 5 Target station number mov K20 8 1 Arrival monitoring time 20 s nov K3 9 Request data length 3 words x21 i ht MOV H10 D20 Request type Request data setting command Woy H2 D21 Subreque
36. of read points 1 lt last device number of host station CPU module gt Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as S2 Use the file register ZR when specifying the expansion data register D or the expansion link register W that are out of area of the data register D or the link register W on the host CPU module respectively excluding the Universal model QCPU and the LCPU For how to calculate areas for the file register ZR refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used Example When not assigning the data register D of the other station CPU module or assigning all of the 32K points of the file register ZR to the expansion data register D Other station Host CPU module 1 CPU module DO Expansion data f fis Data register tenias Specify within DO to 12287 D12287 ZR12287 ZR12288 Specify within ZR12288 to 32767 ZR32767 1 File register with 32K points or more is required for the host CPU Control data See Section 6 4 for how to handle the control data of the SREAD instruction when reading from the word device memory of other stations The control data should be handled in the same way as when reading the word device memory using the READ instruction Thus this section omits its explanation x The number of steps for the SREAD instruction is 10 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions MELSEC Q L
37. or SW can be used Instruction Executing symbol condition Command JP SREAD Jn st 82 01 02 03 JP SREAD 723 Command _ ep sREAD Un st s 01 02 03 Ml GP SREAD 9 3 The following format can be used only when the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU Instruction Executing symbol condition Command f Psr Jn s1 s2 01 02 JP SREAD Command f GP SREAD Un s1 s2 01 02 GP SREAD 2 The SREAD instruction can be programmed without argument D3 However in such a case the operation is identical to the READ instruction With the SREAD instruction different operations are available depending on whether D3 is omitted or not 3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU the read notification device set as argument D3 for the target station is ignored Same operation as with the READ instruction 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Setting data Set data Set by Data type Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal S1 ee oe Ge ee E device of the local station that stores the control data Charact
38. the ZNRD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the ZNRD instruction is being executed Sequence program ZNRD instruction Send receive direction flag Completion device Status display device at completion Errors Program example END END END END processing processing processing processing O E e i ON ZNRD instruction execution i i is completed i OFF J i ON e A 1 l OFF ON OFF a eae Abnormal i ON completion i i 4 Normal OFF LO ooo io completion y One scan 1 When execution of a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns ON and the result is stored in the data link instruction execution result ZNRD instruction storage area address 207 of the buffer memory See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic A program that reads the contents of D10 to 14 of station number 4 from D200 to 204 of station number 1 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X22 X19 HH HH 0 ane 31 K4 D10 D200 K5 MO X19 Initial normal completion signal Read command MO M1 A A H SET Y30 Normal completion display RST Y31 M1 UD Mov 6207 Do Error code
39. 00s Number of resend X19 Initial normal completion signal Read error code etc 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION REQ instruction communication request source station MELSEC Q L b A program to perform remote STOP to the Q L QnACPU with the station number 13 in the network number 7 Station No 1 Programmable E71 controller CPU 1 1 Channel Hio When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F Station No 13 REQ instruction communication request destination station Programmable controller CPU E71 A 2222 gt gt A Network No 7 MO X20 8 Mov H91 Control data setting command mov K1 _ _ _ _ _ _a _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ _ _ mm_ _ _ MOV H3FF mov K7 mov K13 mov K20 mov K3 X21 n i a YY tov H10 Request data setting command _ O H2 mov H1 X22 X19 mov K5 Write command JP REQ J7 DO D20 D30 DO D2 D3 D4 DS D8 Dg D20 D21 D22 D7 MO Clock data setting required Channel used by the local station Target station s CPU type Control CPU Target station network number Target station number Arrival monitoring time 20 s Request data length 3 words Req
40. 1 Reset the CPU or Stop and Run the CPU Read the CPU information 1 1 Unmatched Send receive Send data as as ees main text of e mail See Section 2 7 See Section 2 8 News condition matching Performed by 1 The open and close processing of the Ethernet module the communication line for sending receiving e mails is automatically executed by the Ethernet module Matched 1 Send E mail news information 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION 2 6 E mail Setting Using a Programming Tool MELSEC Q L This section describes the settings required to send and receive e mails using a programming tool 1 DNS setting Purpose of setting Specify the IP address of the DNS server when setting the mail server name using the domain name by the e mail setting see 2 Start procedure Network parameter setting screen gt Setting screen Initial Setting Network Parameter Ethernet Initial Setting Module No 1 mef LL EA E E ESA A ESAS E as 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L Initial settings Description of setting Setting range options Timer Setting 1 DNS Setting TCP ULP Timer Set the time of packet existence at TCP data send 2 to 32767 Set the interval for checking the receive enabled TCP Zero Window Timer Bite 2 to 32767 us TCP Resend Timer Set the time to resend at TCP data send 2
41. 3 Remote password unlock processing Data communication 4 Various operation of the FTP Is the connection to be used subject to the remote password check Remote password lock processing 5 Remote password lock processing 6 Disconnect a connection with the FTP server 1 Checking the initial processing of the Ethernet module Make sure that the Ethernet module s initial processing has normally completed by checking the LED display input signal of the Ethernet module LED display The INIT LED on the front of the Ethernet module flashes e 1 0 signal The initial normal completion signal X19 turns on 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 2 Login to the Ethernet module Once the Ethernet module s initial processing has completed normally log in to the Ethernet module Example Start FTP from MS DOS prompt of Microsoft Windows 1 TN 2 gt aa open 10 97 79 14 ready 3 gt ES 16 97 79 14 lt none gt gt QI71E71 3 gt ESSE ex Command Prompt ftp o olx Microsoft Windows XP Version 5 1 26001 lt C gt Copyright 1985 2061 Microsoft Corp iC gt WINDOWS gt cd Connected to 10 97 79 14 226 QJ71E71 FIP server 331 Password required 230 User logged in if t p gt Start FTP ftp lt ret gt Connect with the FTP server open IP address of the FTP server lt ret gt Des
42. 4 37 REQ data link instruction 4 37 6 28 6 34 RESPONSE COE c cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeetees 5 20 Routing parameter settings 3 15 S SEND data link instruction 4 13 6 37 Send mail address setting 2 14 Send mail settidG oooonoonninnnnnninnnconninncnnco 2 12 Simultaneous broadcast ec eeeeeeeeeteeees 4 5 SMTP SEIVE cccccccccssessnceeeeecssseeeeeeess 2 8 2 13 SREAD data link instruction 4 23 6 46 Station No lt gt IP information s es 3 5 Station No lt gt IP information system Conversion Method ecceeceeeeteeeteeeneeeees 3 6 SWRITE data link instruction 4 24 6 51 T Table exchange system oooonnconccnccinccinnccnnon 3 12 Target network NO ooooonnccnccnccnnccccnccnconncnnnon 3 15 U Use together system oooncoinconicciccincncoccnanannns 3 14 Ww WRITE data link instruction 4 24 6 56 Z ZNRD data link instruction 4 31 6 64 ZNWR data link instruction 4 32 6 68 Index 2 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaire
43. Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the S1 11 Clock set flag dedicated instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Continued to the next page 6 29 6 29 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Set data Setting range Set by The clock data upon abnormal end is stored in BCD This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 12 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Clock data set only if an error 51 12 Month 01H to 12x Year 00x to 99x Last 2 digits to 2 S1 15 occurs 81 13 Hour 004 to 23x Date 01u to 314 S1 14 Second 00h to 59H Minute 00h to 59x S1 15 Year 00x to 99x First 2 digits Day of the week 00x to 06x 00 Sun to 06x Sat Stores the network number of the station that detected an abnormality Abnormal detection network This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete number 4 type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network number Stores the station number of the station that detected an abnormality Abnormal detection station This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete number 4 type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not
44. CPU module Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as D1 Use the file register ZR when specifying the expansion data register D or the expansion link register W that are out of area of the data register D or the link register W on the host CPU module respectively excluding the Universal model QCPU and the LCPU For how to calculate areas for the file register ZR refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used Example When not assigning the data register D of the other station CPU module or assigning all of the 32K points of the file register ZR to the expansion data register D Other station Host CPU module 1 CPU module Expansion data i P Data register ister Specify within DO to 12287 ZR12287 ZR12288 Specify within ZR12288 to 32767 ZR32767 1 File register with 32K points or more is required for the host CPU 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Control data Functions Local station Programmable controller CPU MELSEC Q L See Section 6 12 for information about how to handle the control data of the SWRITE instruction when writing to the word device memory of other station The control data should be handled is the same as when writing to the word device memory using the WRITE instruction Thus this section omits its explanation The number of steps for the SWRITE instruction is 11 This instruction
45. Index register Zn Others F K H Bit device ULNGO Instruction Executing symbol condition Command S2 D1 J REQ Co and c APRo Jn 52 D1 and S2 01 S2 D1 Set data Set data Set by Data type Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 Jn 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal Character Character string Un S1 Head device of the local station that stores the control data S2 Head device of the local station that stores the request data Device name D1 Head device of the local station that stores the response data System Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of D2 the instruction D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data The REQ instruction can be executed only when the target station is a Q L QnACPU The REQ instruction cannot be executed to an ACPU connected to a MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet network system The number of basic steps for the REQ instruction is 9 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Setting range Set by 1 a to b7
46. Instruction Executing symbol condition Command ZP MRECV o r MRECV Un 1 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Description Set by 2 Data ae Un Un Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn Higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal S Head device of the local station that stores the control data Head device of the local station that stores the contents of the oened em NUS Device name e mail header attached file Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data User stingBinary 16 16 bits The MRECV instruction can be executed only when the local station is a Q LCPU The number of steps for the MRECV instruction is 10 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Control data MELSEC Q L Execution type complete type data b15 to b8 b7 to bO 0 0 1 0 1 Complete type bit 7 Designate whether or not the setting of the clock data is required at abnormal completion 0 Clock data setting is not required The clock data at error occurrence is not set in S 11 to S 15
47. It is recommended to use the following method to treat the file name from the external device e Use the ASCII code characters upper case for the alphabet letters for the file to be written to the FTP server Do not change the file name for the file read from the Q LCPU Each memory for Q LCPU does not have any sub directories Each file is stored in the root directory 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 3 Attributes Specify the following when changing the attributes of the file stored in the Q LCPU drive to be transferred r Read Only gt w read write enabled See the quote change command in Section 5 6 4 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 6 2 QILCPU user file list The user created files files that are can be created by the user with a programming tool that can be designated for file transfer are described below Drive that can store the file Type File type File identifier See section 5 6 1 Remarks o Ra Parameters ora O O OC OO O frenare 50D DD DN Device comments ac o o o o 0 ao es ee EAEN as A SA ab RO l For debugging x x O x amw ee x Error history data x O O Can be stored x Cannot be stored x1 A password can be registered in program files device comment files and device initial value files of the designated memory program memory standard ROM memory card SD memory card For passwords
48. LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Instruction execution timing a When normal completion 1 READ instruction SREAD instruction Sequence scan 0 END 0 ENDF H0 END 730 END 70 END Read command i A programmable controller CPU Read completion device Device specified with D2 Read completion device D2 1 device Read data storage device Device specified with D1 l l l j l l l I l Local station l l l j l l l l ji l ee ono naaa ls A A A Ss e e AA A A SA e a Gre ee al yl tw iy eg eee Pe Pie E AM ce oe oe Me ws i ge ee gy AMA S On al ay we By ish New em Pe om eRe Poet fut en ee ee q Ethernet l EEF A module l Smg i E A E E ay E ETERS CEEE EEEE a AE E E N E es E N A E pe E E wea all SS SS Pe gee Se ee et SS SS ge ee ee ee no ee en ee ee ee ee ee g Ethernet module Des et seca senate E Seat eas tae sect asic anes eros hee eat ec ice kes AR og ee eC a at se ic Ses see ES set et a sc eh es oe ete See E ra pte tam ee el yt tea ee ee ee ekg iy Bn gs ed TA ey lig RS gag ee pe eT OM cy ee a yp el q Sequence scan i ii l T e i Read data storage device arget station Device specified with S2 ll l i i l ji programmable controller CPU Read notify device Device specified with D3 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRU
49. LOG Always designate directly after the drive name of the transfer source When designating the transfer destination file path FTP client side always designate the transfer source drive name When the transfer destination file path is not designated the file name set by the FTP application on the FTP client side is used to store the file The transfer destination is the connected current directory of the FTP startup connection mdir Writes a file to a CPU module When writing multiple files the file name and extension are designated using wild cards or When writing multiple files the send confirmation is performed for each file transfer mput TRANSFER source file path When writing all files with extension QPG mput QPG The transfer destination is the memory where the parameter file used for the current operation of a CPU module is stored The destination file name is the same as the file name on the FTP client side See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER open Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Designation example 3 Designation example 4 Caution put Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Caution MELSEC Q L Connects to the FTP server by designating the host name or IP address for the FTP server along with the FTP login name and pass
50. Link INStrUCtION 0 cee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateeaeeas 4 1 4 2 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations ooonnocnicnnicininnncnnonnnonnccnncnnrrarn rar r arca 4 2 4 3 Using the Data Link INStrUCtiONS aera EEEE EEE E ENE 4 5 4 4 Data Link INStUCIONAS aia cta 4 8 4 5 Data Sending ReCeiving serisinin anai iaai iadeii a d i iada aa ii ieaa 4 12 4 5 1 Data sending receiving for receive with the main program SEND RECV n se 4 13 4 5 2 Data sending receiving for receive with an interrupt program SEND RECVS cece 4 19 4 6 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations READ WRITB ooconccnicnncnnninoccnncicocncanananananarancnns 4 23 4 7 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations ZNRD ZNWR coonoonconconccnccnnconcconnconnconccanccnnnon 4 31 4 8 Reading Writing Clock Data Remote RUN Remote STOP REQ 0ooccocccnccnocccocinacinacinanananrancrancnanannns 4 37 4 9 Error Codes for Data Link INStrUCtIONS oiai i a a E AAE 4 42 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER 5 1 to 5 34 91 Ele Transfer FUNCIONS iaa A a 5 1 5 1 1 FTP server support functions of the Ethernet module ooooocooccconncccnncccncccnncccnnccononrnnonrnnonocnnnnncnnnn 5 2 5 2 File Transferable Range naninita i A ARARE A EAE RE ESA EEEE Ea E 5 4 5 3 FTP Parameter Settings for File Transfer from a Programming Tool ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeereees 5 5 5 4 Procedure and Required Processing on the External Device Side F
51. SET Y31 Error completion display 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 14 J P ZNWR This instruction writes data to word devices of other stations ACPU Applicable device Internal device Link direct device Intelligent File register JOO function module x Can only use T C D W Instruction Executing symbol condition Command J ZNWR J ZNWR Command JP ZNWR JP ZNWR Setting data Description Setting range Set by Data type Target station network number Designates the network number of the target 1 to 239 Binary 16 bits station 1 to 64 Constant The station with the corresponding station number User Target station number 81H to 89H Designates the station number of the target All stations having the Character string station designated group number FFu All stations having the target network number Continued to the next page 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Setting data Pl Description Setting range Set by Data type Data written storage head device target station Designate the head device of the target station to which data is written f gt Device name Data written storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station that stores the data to be written When writing to Q L QnA AnUCPU Length of data written 1 to 230 Const
52. Subject main text Mail server E mail address parameter setting gt 1 O No 5 Main text of e mail QJ71E71 1 1 0 number of the Ethernet module 2 Control data such as sending e mail address This indicates the e mail address of the transmission destination device set on the Send E mail Address Settings screen 3 Sending e mail Subject main text The Subject consists of No of transmissions and the character data specified by a sequence program It is not converted to ASCII format Designate text data in ASCII characters in sequence programs 4 Completion bit 5 Main text of e mail This indicates the character string designated by the MSEND instruction It is not converted to ASCII format by the Ethernet module Designate the main text in ASCII characters in sequence programs The following binary code data is processed as control codes ODOAH Line feed code CR LF 00H End of main text Itis recommended to use 78 characters or less data when writing each line of the main text sending data Be sure to add a line feed code CR LF ODOAn at the end of the main text lines 6 Attached file No attached file can be sent when sending data as the main text of e mail 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 1 Send using the sequence program The following explains how an e mail is sent using a sequence program For details see Section 6 3 Direction Create control data at D
53. Target station storage channel Mov K7 D4 Target station network number MOV K15 05 J Target station number MOV K20 08 Delivery monitoring time 20 s Nov ka 09 J Send data length 4 words x21 a WN Mov K10 D100 Send command Hov K20 bos J gt Send data mov K30 D102 MOV K40 D103 X22 X19 i i f 1k NOY KS 07 Y Number of resend send data A pe s setting uP SEND J7 D0 D100 MO J X19 Initial normal completion command signal y G a E H l Processing program when send completion 4 m AO A a el y Processing program when normal completion 4 m TE A nomna ana j Processing program when abnormal Performs error code reading etc completion MOV D1 D200 4 17 4 17 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b Station 15 program RECV instruction When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 1 HA OA completion i mov D2 D100 i i H Performs error code reading etc l i i ov H80 D20 Clock data setting required Control data setting command Jpov K5 D22 Local station storage channel mov 20 D28 Arrival monitoring time 20 s sm400 x19 v0N e i eI fMov 6205 D110 X19 Initial normal completion signal D110 4 A 3P RECY 37 D20 D300 M10 A hk i 7 A et O Sal i 4 H i Processing program when receive completion O E AA A AAA il cm Ya Ge Su l f i 1
54. The resend timing when the READ command is executed after designating the number of resend is described below 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L Example READ instruction execution timing 1 Communication timing when the READ instruction completed successfully when resend is not performed Programmable E71 E71 Programmable controller CPU Local station another station controller CPU READ gt gt gt Command UDP a gt gt Receive response ra _ UPP CH e l gt Read i Arrival i monitoring Response Read data time 1 r tai eceive response p UDP 4 Execution ai gt completion 2 Communication timing when the READ instruction completed successfully when resend is performed Programmable E71 E71 Programmable controller CPU Local station another station controller CPU Command UDP Receive response gt f UDP 4 Arrival 4 y Es SS monitoring time 1 No response 3 Command UDP Resend gt se Receive response Repeat for UDP 4 the number t 25 ESE gt Read request of resend 2 Response __ Read data doet Receive response aoe UDP 4 Execution ele eee cess a completion 1 The user designates the arrival monitoring time with the READ instruction control data S1 8 2 The user
55. UNIX No conversion portable terminal 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 4 Receiving by a personal computer The following explains how a PC UNIX portable terminal receives e mail sent from the Ethernet module After setting the environment where the Internet is accessible with a mail user agent receive an e mail on the receiving message screen as follows Example The following shows an example of the reception of e mail sent using the MSEND instruction see 3 The following is a screen of Microsoft Corporation s Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 i File Edit View Insert Format Tools Actions Help 3 da Reply Reply to All 63 Forward From Mail address of Ethernet module eee Sent Sun 00 00 0000 00 00 AM To Mail address of external device Cc Subject No 1 testmail msend Error Machine1 001 a From Displays the e mail address of the Ethernet module By entering the mail addresses of the send destination devices in the address book the registered names display names can be displayed and it makes the management easier b Subject This indicates the No of transmissions 1 and the Subject written by a sequence program 1 This is the number automatically added each time an Ethernet module sends an e mail The numbers are counted up from 1 When the number reaches 4294967296 the number is cleared to 0 Then the numbers are counted up from 0 again to 4294967296 c Main text of
56. When the directory is not designated for the transfer source file path FTP client the file is written to the connected current directory at FTP server startup connection When the transfer destination file path FTP server side is not designated the file is stored to the memory where the parameter file used for the current operation of a CPU module is stored See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER pwd Function Designation format Caution quit Function Designation format Same function quote Function Designation format Designation example Caution rename Function Designation format Designation example Caution user Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Caution MELSEC Q L Displays the current directory name of a CPU module pwd Each memory of a CPU module do not have any sub directories and the files are stored in the root directory Therefore is displayed as the execution result of the pwd command Disconnects the connection to the FTP server and ends FTP quit bye Sends the FTP server subcommand Ethernet module dedicated command quote Ethernet module DEDICATED COMMAND Ethernet module dedicated command See 2 quote status Only the Ethernet module dedicated command shown in 2 can be designated directly after the quote command Changes the fil
57. X Y00 to X Y1F X 20 A mooo OP OOO D20 y Designate main text as the send data format wove KI D22 Designates the send destination number OVP K16 D29 J Designate the send data length LOS D30 J Designate the subject length MOVP testmail msend D200 Designate Subject cove Error Machinet 001 0207 J Designate the main text ZP MSEND uo D20 D200 mo Send the e mail mo mi E AA HA Processing program when normal completion M1 menee 1 Processing program when abnormal completion 1 A cance ea ee eee Br pa ee eee ere 4 When an error occurs while sending e mail from the sending mail server to an external device an error code is stored in the receiving error log area 1 The following shows the transmission format of the main text designated in the control data of the MSEND instruction If data is sent as the main text of e mail the Ethernet module does not convert the transmission format Designate the main text data in ASCII characters in sequence programs b12 to b8 Completion type Designates the transmission format of the main text Setting values for designating the main text Applicable data transmission format Format set o Description of processing b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 Send the main text data The Ethernet module does not convert the transmission format Designate the main text data in ASCII characters in sequence programs PC
58. and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Program example The following example shows a program that sends data to channel 5 of station number 15 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F x20 i MOV H81 DO With arrival confirmation Contra clock data setting required setting command mov K3 D2 Local station usage channel MOV K5 Dg Target station storage channel mov K DA Target station network number oy KIS D5 Target station number nov K20 D8 Delivery monitoring time 20 s moy K4 D9 Send data length 4 words x21 HH moy Kio D100 Send data setting command mov K20 Do1 Send data MOY K30 D102 MOY kao D103 x22 x19 7 1 Woy KS D7 Number of resend Send command uP SEND J7 DO D100 MO X19 Initial normal completion signal NO A we Pe ee ee ae Processing program when send completion Mi A O O A y Processing program when normal completion Hf Processing program when abnormal Performs error code reading etc completion MOV D1 D200 I5 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 10 JP GP SREAD This instruction reads data in word devices of other stations Applicable device f Link direct device Intelligent Internal device i Index register Constant JOO function module KH Others device UM CO x1 T C D W ST SD
59. and POP3 server from a domain name 2 Make the DNS setting when the mail server name shown in item 2 is specified with a domain name No setting is required when it is specified with an IP address 3 When obtaining the IP addresses from a domain name the DNS servers are searched sequentially starting from the first DNS server 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 E mail setting Purpose of setting Perform the setting to use the e mail function Start procedure Network parameter setting screen gt E mail Setting Setting screen Network Parameter Ethernet E mail Setting Module No 1 SEE General Setting Password Mail Address J Check Received Mail Enquiry Interval f 1 Mail Server Name Send Mail Setting SMTP Server Name Receive Mail Setting POP Server Name Send Mail Address Setting News Setting End Cancel Setting item Description of setting item Setting range option Set the password to the mail server Up to 63 characters Mail Address Set the mail address for the Ethernet module Up to 256 characters Check mark Select whether or not to make inquiries to the incoming mail Inquire server regarding the receiving status No check mark Do not inquire Set the time interval and unit for making inquiries to the 30sto 24 h Enquiry Interval incoming mail server h min s SMTP Server Name Check Received Mail Set the send mail server name
60. cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 120 Station number 81 16 S1 17 x1 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 2 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic 3 It can be specified when the local station has an Ethernet module of function version D or later The setting value is fixed to O3FFH for a module other than the above Access is made to the control CPU x4 Nothing is stored if the execution source detects an error when receiving an instruction 5 When the REQ instruction is executed to the redundant system with a control system or standby system CPU specified the instruction may be unsuccessfully completed due to system switching occurred on the target station error code 4244H 4248H If this has occurred execute the REQ instruction again Request data All values are set by the user Remote RUN Remote STOP 0010 When station No is specified in S1 5 0030 When all stations or a group is specified in S1 5 00014 Remote RUN S2 1 Sub request type 00021 Remote STOP S2 0 Request type Designate whether or not to forcefully execute remote RUN STOP operations 0001 Do not force execution S2 2 Mode 0003 Force execution setting at remote STOP The forc
61. controller CPU and the communication function using the random access buffer cannot be used together Only one of them can be used at any given time 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 1 2 Sending e mail using the programmable controller CPU monitor function 1 Monitor function of the programmable controller CPU The monitor function of the programmable controller CPU is used to regularly monitor the status of the programmable controller CPU and device values and send e mail to the designated external device when they match with the notification conditions programmable controller CPU status and device values set by the user Sending e mail using the programmable External device controller CPU monitor function news setting 1 Ethernet module Portable terminal MRECV device that cannot instruction handle attached files Remarks Subject Binary format Attached Maximum 960 Binary to ASCII conversion Binary to CSV conversion Binary format Maximum 960 Binary to ASCII conversion words words file Main text 1 For the notification of CPU status monitoring only the Subject that stores the programmable controller CPU status will be sent 2 The Ethernet module receives the Subject without decoding a The programmable controller CPU in the Ethernet module loaded station is monitored for every CPU inquiry time interval set by the user The following informat
62. controller CPUs of other stations e Section 3 3 2 provides an overview of the processing for Station No lt gt IP information conversion 4 To use the file transfer FTP function Section 5 3 describes the parameter settings using a programming tool to transfer a file e Section 5 6 describes the FTP operation command on the FTP client external device side that is supported by the Ethernet module To know about the following items see the User s Manual Basic 1 Detailed descriptions of the error codes Troubleshooting error check methods descriptions and reference manuals of error codes 2 Storage locations of the error codes for the Ethernet module Storage locations buffer memories of error codes Structure of this manual 1 Setting Parameters with a programming tool a By setting parameters with a programming tool the sequence programs for communicating with external devices can be simplified in the Ethernet module b In this manual parameter settings using a programming tool are explained in detail for each item displayed on the setting screens For details on the types of the setting screens objectives of the settings the setting items and an outline of the setting operation using a programming tool see the User s Manual Basic c Refer to the chapters related to the functions to be used and set the required parameters Then load the set parameters to the programmable controller CPU o
63. designates the number of resend with the READ instruction control data S1 7 This item must be set at every instruction execution 3 The Ethernet module performs a resend of the command for the number of resend when this response is not received 4 The receiving side Ethernet module notifies the sending side Ethernet module of successful data reception 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION 4 4 Data Link Instructions MELSEC Q L This section explains the overview of the data send receive in each data link instruction when accessing via Ethernet Module Channels 1 to 8 of the Ethernet module and network module in the figure of the following table are the OS areas that store send receive data with each data link instruction o SEND Data is sent SEND and received RECV between the Q L QnACPU stations x Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module N W module Ethernet module Programmable N W module controller CPU channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6 channel 7 channel 8 channel 1 channel 2 channel 3 channel 4 channel 5 channel 6 channel 7 channel 8 HI RECV y RECVS IN See Section 4 5 1 4 5 2 RECVS Reads data from another station s word device With SREAD the completion device on the target station can be turned on Programmable control
64. eerie coat When the data is stored in the receive station channel the bit corresponding to each channel of buffer memory RECV instruction execution request area turns on Data can be read automatically bu using this signal for the receive command The signal turns off shen the RECV instruction is completed 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L This instruction reads received data Applicable device Link direct device Intelligent q gt i Constant File register JOO function module Index register Zn Others O 6 6 Z RECVS for Interrupt Programs Set data S D1 O oal O Instruction Executing symbol condition K H device UGH Command __ Z RECVS Un Z RECVS 1 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Description Set by Data type Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 4 n Un Un A ive noe 3 User String Binary 16 bits 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal Head device of the local station that stores the control data D1 Head device of the local station that stores the receive data Device name System D2 Designate as dummy Bit The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in settin
65. end of lines of the main text Store the status at completion of the instruction Completion status 0 Normal Other than 0 Abnormal error code 3 Designate the external device to which the e mail is sent by the setting number of the Ethernet send mail address setting with a programming tool 1 to 16 The setting number of the destination external device S1 3 to S1 8 Designate the data length Subject attached file or Subject main text of the e mail stored in S2 0 to S2 n 1 When sending data as an attached file Subject O to 373 attached file 1 to 6144 1to 6517 1 to 6517 The data length of e mail words Se 2 When sending data as the main text 1 to 1333 Subject 0 to 373 Main text 1 to 960 1 to 1333 The data length of e mail words Designate the data length of the Subject of the e mail stored in S1 10 Subject length S2 0 to S2 n 0 to 373 0 to 373 The data length of the Subject words This stores the valid invalid status of the clock data in S1 12 to S1 15 0 Invalid 1 Valid 81 12 Higher 8 bits month 01 to 12h lower 8 bits last 2 digits of year 00H to 99h 81 13 Higher 8 bits hour 00x to 23x Clock data lower 8 bits date 01H to 31 S1 14 set only when abnormal Higher 8 bits second 00x to 59x S1 2 Send destination number Send data length S1 11 Clock set flag System lower 8 bits minute 00x to 59x 81 15 High
66. flag Completion device Status display device at completion Errors Program example OFF END END END END processing processing processing processing SSE oe it execution is aa OFF OFF OFF i 1 ji i j Abnormal i ON completion i i L esas raSi EEA a One scan 5 When the instruction is executed using J WRITE G WRITE the next write processing is executed in succession after one write processing is completed while the write command is on When the instruction is executed using JP WRITE GP WRITE the write processing is executed only once when the write command switches from off to on at rise When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000 or higher User s Manual Basic See the program example of the SWRITE instruction described in Section 6 11 The SWRITE instruction only differs from the WRITE instruction on one point namely that the write notification device D3 is not designated at the end of arguments 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 13 J P ZNRD This instruction reads data from word devices of other sta
67. i buffer memory J address 205 ON i OFF i i Completion device D2 _ 2Il2 En Abroma 2h completion Status display device ao ci o at completion D2 1 OFF EEEIEE completion y One scan One scan i 5 When executing the instruction using JP RECV GP RECV the read processing is executed only once when the read instruction flag goes from off to on at rise 6 22 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4AFFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic Program example The following example shows a program that reads receive data from channel 5 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 lA mov 80 p20 Clock data setting required Control data setting command Nov 6 p22 Local station storage channel fMov Ko D28 Arrival monitoring time 20 s 5M400 x19 ON gs i i finov X19 Initial normal completion signal i n Processing program when abnormal completion MOV D21 D100 I i A Performs error code reading etc i i i
68. in any other operating environments may cause electric shocks fires or malfunctions or may damage or degrade the module e To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw e Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product e Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Instructions A CAUTION e Connectors for external connection must be crimped or pressed with the tool specified by the manufacturer or must be correctly soldered If the connection is incomplete it may cause the module to short circuit catch fire or malfunction e Shut off the external power supply for the system in all phases before connecting the AUI cable e Wh
69. in to the Ethernet module at a time 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 Precautions when writing a file 1 Operation to overwrite an existing file cannot be performed Either delete corresponding file using the file delete command delete mdelete or change the file name using rename command before the file is written The program file set in the parameter file currently used for the Q LCPU operation cannot be written Set the Q LCPU to the STOP status then write the file File transmission attributes change file write etc for file write can only be conducted for the Q LCPU program memory or the RAM area of the memory card or SD memory card Check the number of files that can be registered to the drive for the files to be stored File write cannot be performed to a drive where the number of files has already reached the allowed number of registered files The files are stored in the designated drive s cluster size units Any drives which fit in the size of the continuous unused clusters in the designated drive memory can be written To restart the Q LCPU operation after writing a file it is recommended to set the switch of the Q LCPU to RUN The status of the Q LCPU can be changed from STOP to RUN with the FTP command however pay full attention to the operation of the programmable controller system When writing files the Ethernet module creates temporary work files FTP_Ixxx TM
70. mail is sent from the external device to the programmable controller side specify the encoding method Base 64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of the attached file Encryption No Compression No Communication with mail SMTP sending server Port number 25 server POP3 receiving server Port number 110 and reception Operation check mailer Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 Internet mail terminology list DNS server Server that manages networks SMTP server Server that delivers transfers e mail between mail servers POP3 server Server that transfers received e mail addressed to subscribers to the corresponding subscribers 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 5 Processing Procedure of the E mail Function The following flowchart illustrates the procedure that is required before sending and receiving e mails When DNS is not used When DNS is used See Section 2 6 1 Register the DNS server See Section 2 6 2 Register the mail address of the local station s Ethernet module When sending receiving e mails using When sending e mails using the programmable controller CPU the CPU monitoring function the external device the external device without news setting with news setting Register the mail address of Register the mail address of See Section 2 6 3 See Section 2 6 3 Set the news condition See Section 2 9
71. mo ER RA eS 1 M A 1 i Processing program when normal completion t A AAA A E i O E EEEN 1 i ML Processing program when abnormal I l I l i I i I i E gt When the data is stored in the receive station channel the bit corresponding to each channel of buffer memory RECV instruction execution request area turns on Data can be read automatically bu using this signal for the receive command The signal turns off shen the RECV instruction is completed Buffer memory Address 205 CDhH Bit location 15 to 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 a O O O l to Channel 1 Channel 2 to Channel 8 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 5 2 Data sending receiving for receive with an interrupt program SEND RECVS This section explains the format and program examples of the RECVS instruction for receive when sending receiving data between the programmable controller CPUs For details on the instruction format and program examples of the SEND instruction see Section 4 5 1 For more details see Sections 6 5 and 6 9 1 Instruction format a SEND instruction Same as the instruction format described in Section 4 5 1 b RECVS instruction Ethernet module start I O signal designation Receive command 1 gt 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU double
72. module prior to file transfer Designating the password registered in the target file of a CPU module enables file operation in the CPU module One password can be set in the Ethernet module If the target file for file transfer changes and a password is registered in the file which is at the changed destination reset the password for the new target file in the Ethernet module When logging into the Ethernet module from the external device the password set in the Ethernet module changes to ak k ok 2 clear Set the password in the QnNUDVCPU file with four characters If a password with 5 or more characters is set the file operation with FTP cannot be performed Caution The password designated using the quote keyword set command is explained 1 If a password is registered in the target file for file transfer use this command to set the password in the Ethernet module after logging into the Ethernet module prior to file transfer 2 The password is used so that the CPU module can allow prohibit access to the target file from outside 3 The password for file access to the CPU module is registered with a programming tool The password designated with this command is for operations with the Ethernet module The user designates the same character string as that registered with a programming tool to the designated file of the CPU module 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L passwa rd L
73. not the clock data setting is required at abnormal completion 0 Clock data setting not required Clock data at error occurrence is not stored in S1 11 to S1 17 1 Clock data setting required Clock data at error occurrence is stored in S1 11 to S1 17 Stores the status at the completion of the instruction S1 1 Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code 2 Channel used by the local Set the channel used by the local station S1 2 1to8 User station 1 to 8 channel 81 3 Target station storage Designate the target station s channel that stores data 1108 us channel 1 to 8 channel Designate the network number of the target station 1 to 239 Network number Target station network 2 S1 4 bar 254 When 254 is designated in Jn The network 1 to 239 254 User u designated by the valid module during other station access Continued to the next page 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Set data Set by 0 Designate the target station 1 Station number specification When the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 120 When the local station is not a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 64 2 Specific group 81H to AOn All the station having the indicated group 1 to 120 Target station number number Can be set when the execution 81H to AOH type designated in S1 is 0 No arrival FFH confirmation 3 All stations FFH All s
74. of the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 specifications Another station is accessible between devices indicated in 1 to 5 of the figure above b The only networks that can be routed are the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and Ethernet 3 2 3 2 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 2 Accessible stations communication request destination stations and relay stations communication relay stations This relay communication function allows communication with programmable controllers of other stations if the communication destination programmable controllers communication request destination stations and all the relay stations to the communication destination stations communication relay stations are configured with the modules listed below a Accessible modules communication request destination stations other stations 1 Programmable controller CPU a NA Basic model QCPU_ __ QOO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU High performance o cpu Q02HCPU QU6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU model QCPU Process CPU EVER PTA QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU QCPU Redundant CPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU OOOO OE Q25PRHCPU Q mode QO0UJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Q03UDCPU Q03UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU Q06UDHCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCP
75. on at the END processing of the scan where the MSEND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the MSEND instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the MSEND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Operation when the MSEND instruction is being executed MSEND instruction Completion device D Ethernet module Mail server Errors 1 Caution 1 D 1 eee One scan Mail When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error codes check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFuH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic Construct an interlock circuit to prevent the MSEND instruction from being executed while the MRECV instruction is being executed This is because the MRECV and MSEND instructions use the random access buffer memory area as a work area 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Program example T
76. other module to the server is short because of the POP3 server specifications access may be restricted lock status on the server side Check the POP3 server specifications and set the inquiry time interval accordingly It is recommended to set the setting value of the inquiry time interval to the default 5 minutes or more b Mail server name Set the Internet service provider and the domain name or IP addresses of the mail servers designated by the system administrator used by the local station s Ethernet module 1 Designate the domain name of the mail server 2 Select the input format decimal hexadecimal of the IP addresses 3 Set the IP address of the outgoing mail server SMTP 4 Set the IP address of the incoming mail server POP3 e The SMTP server delivers transfers e mails between mail servers The POP3 server transfers received e mails addressed to users to the corresponding users The mail server names must be designated to use the e mail function See POINT of 1 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Send mail address setting Purpose of setting Register the e mail address of the external devices where e mail is to be sent Start procedure E mail setting screen gt Send Mail Address Setting Setting screen Ethernet Send Mail Address Setting No Send Mail Address INN JJ A IN Eo En ee of s MY gt 13 ee pO 15 SCS
77. password unlock processing lock processing in compliance with the FTP transfer operation procedure described in Section 5 4 1 How to read the sequence program file from Q LCPU FTP client FTP server Notify that the files will not be converted No file conversion notification o bynaly lt ret gt Set the password of the target file for file transfer e Password setting in the Ethernet module This is not required if a password is quote keyword set password lt ret gt not registered or a Ge quote passwd rd password lt ret gt Check the file list in the programmable e Display file list controller CPU dir lt ret gt or Is lt ret gt Does not exist Does the file to read exist Exists y Read the file e File read get TRANSFER DESTINATION FILE NAME lt ret gt gt End file read 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER During STOP Does not exist FTP client gt FTP server C Start file write y Notify that the files will not be converted Check the operation status of the programmable controller CPU Operation status During RUN y Set the programmable controller CPU to STOP status gt y Set the password of the target file for file transfer This is not required if a password is not registered es Check the file list in the programmable controlle
78. reception data length specified with the MRECV instruction it stores the data equivalent to the reception data length and ignores the remaining data 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 1 Reception using the sequence program The following explains the designation method in a sequence program For details see Section 6 2 Instruction Un G9858 F sa Read the receive mail information Create control data at DO and on E mail is read if there is recieve mail in Ethernet module Processing program when normal completion Processing program when abnormal completion 2 Execution timing of the instruction Initial Receive mail Receive mail processing confirmation confirmation aa r 1 Inquiry interval Inquiry interval i Initial normal completion X19 i AAA 2 Number of mails remaining 9857 to Flag indicating whether there are receive mails Buffer memory address 9858 bit 15 on the server 0 lt 2 0 Buffer memory address i i 22640 Buffer memory address A Mail 2 Mail buffer MRECYV instruction MRECYV instruction completion device p LSet tate ver pc eb MRECYV instruction completion completion device 1 Mail 1 Mail 2 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 1 Start up the local station programmable controller The parameters for the e mail function are st
79. see the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used 2 The number of files that can be written with FTP is calculated with the following formula The maximum number of files that can be stored in the related drive 1 1 Each memory of Q LCPU does not have any sub directory Files are all stored in the root directory 2 For the restrictions and details of the Q LCPU user files see the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER 5 6 3 Response code MELSEC Q L For information regarding the response codes that are returned to the external device FTP client by the Ethernet module FTP server see the manual for the FTP client for the codes except the following 4000H Other than the following See the manual for the FTP client See the User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used to take corrective action See the User s Manual Basic to take corrective action The first two digits of the response code is described below 123 ll Response regarding the start of the request processing Response regarding the successful end of the request proccessing Response indicationg the necessity for additional information pertaining to the request processing Response regarding abnormal end of the request processing Response r
80. see the completion status S1 1 indicated in the control data 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 6 Reading Writing Word Devices of Other Stations READ WRITE This section explains the format and program examples of the READ WRITE instructions that are used to read and write data of word devices of other stations For details see Sections 6 4 and 6 10 to 6 12 1 Instruction format a READ SREAD instructions Network number designation Read command jee i Execution H JP READ Jn S1 S2 D1 D2 during startup Read command pae 4 Execution H 4P SREAD Jn 81 S2 01 D2 03 H danad start p Network module Ethernet module start I O signal designation Read command GP Execution o GP READ S1 S2 D1 D2 during startup Read command Gave A Execution er 7 1 The SREAD instruction can be programmed without argument D3 However in such a case the operation is identical to the READ instruction With the SREAD instruction different operations are available depending on whether D3 is omitted or not 2 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU the read notification device set as argument D3 for the target station is ignored Same operation as with the READ instruction 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF A
81. single quotation mark indicates one argument The part with the brackets indicates that it is optional 1 Password If a password is registered in the target file for file transfer the password must be set in the Ethernet module prior to file transfer For how to set a password see Section 5 6 4 QCPU keyword set LCPU passwd rd or passwd wr 2 File path a Select the file by differentiating the drive name and file name in the Q LCPU b When designating a file in the Q LCPU using the FTP functions designate the file in the following manner Designation format drive name 1 file name extension Designation example 0 MAINSEQ1 QPG Extension identifier File name Drive name drive No Designation details 1 Drive name drive No e Designates the drive name for the memory used for file transfer The relationships between the Q LCPU memory used and drive name are as follows QCPU QnUDVCPU excluded QnUDVCPU LCPU e High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant No designation CPU Parameter valid drive Broarne designated with the DIP switches A CPU other than those listed Drive name above Program memory po Programme SE o SRAMcard Flash card ATA card SD memory card 3 Standard RAM Standard ROM 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 2 File name extension The corresponding file for the file transfer is desi
82. source station is connected when sending a communication request message or a response message respectively Set the Network No of the Ethernet or other networks to which the next communication relay receive station or the next communication relay send station is connected when sending a communication 1 to 239 request message or a response message respectively Universal model QCPU LCPU 0 to 120 A module other than a Universal model QCPU and an LCPU 0 to 64 Set the station number of the target Ethernet module network module that is used as relay to the Relay Station No ey al network set by the Relay station No 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 1 Target Network No Designate the Network No of Ethernet or other networks to which the communication request destination station or the communication request source station is connected when sending a communication request message or a response message respectively 2 Relay Network No Designate the Network No of Ethernet or other networks to which the next communication relay reception station or the next communication relay transmission station is connected when sending a communication request message or a response message respectively 3 Relay Station No Designate the station number of the target Ethernet module network module that is used as a relay to the network set by the Relay station No The following stations require the routing paramete
83. the mail server and stores it in the buffer memory when the MRECV instruction is executed Continue to execute the MRECV instruction based on this information 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Sample program The following is a sample program for receiving e mail by a programmable controller CPU It performs reception processing of e mail using the receive command X21 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F w M60 Y M60 U0 G9858 F HA rv H200 DO Designate to make inquiry to the server La LA O D2 Designate to read the head mail wove KO D9 Designate to adjust to the data length of the receive mail movP KO D10 Designate to adjust to the header data length of the receive mail ZP HRECV vo DO D100 MO Read receive mails M m E A A a YF Processing program when normal completion Ln Jd M r eu pas o a a Processing program when abnormal completion The following explains the types of execution that can be designated in the MRECV instruction s control data For more details on how to designate the execution types see Section 6 2 MRECV Instruction b9 b8 Complete type Type of MRECV instruction execution Designate whether or not to read the next mail after executing the MRECV instruction Setting value for designating the p e Setting type Description of processing Demerit type of execution
84. this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice afa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V org sl CZECH REP Czech Branch Avenir Business Park Radlick 714 113a 2 158 00 Praha 5 Phone 420 251551470 Fax 420 251 551 471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 0 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 0 1 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 4198800 Fax 353 0 1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 1 20864 Agrate Brianza MB Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Poland Branch Krakowska 50 PL 32 083 Balice Phone 48 0 12 630 47 00 Fax 48 0 12 630 47 01 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V 52 bld 3 Kosmodamianskaya nab 8 floor RU 115054 Moscow Phone 7 495 721 2070 Fax 7 495 721 2071 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 081
85. to 32767 y Set the confirmation wait time at TCP close TCP End Timer 2 to 32767 processing IP Assembly Timer Set the wait time for division data packets 1 to 32767 Response Monitoring Timer Set the response wait time 2 to 32767 Set the time to start confirming existence of an Dest Confirmation Start Interval external device after communication with it has 1 to 32767 terminated a Set the time interval between reconfirming Dest Confirmation Interval 1 to 32767 existence Set the number of times to reconfirm existence Dest Confirmation Resend when a response to the existence confirmation is 1 to 32767 not received Select the input format of the IP addresses of the Input Format DEC HEX DNS servers IP Address of DNS Semert_____ Setthe IP address of DNSserver1 IP Address of DNS Server2_ Setthe IP address of DNSserver2 IP Address of DNS Server3 Setthe IP address of DNS server3 IP Address of DNS Server4 Setthe IP address of DNS servert 1 See the User s Manual Basic a DNS setting Designate the Internet service provider used by the local station s Ethernet module and the IP addresses of the domain name servers DNS designated by a system administrator 1 Select the input format of the IP addresses decimal hexadecimal 2 Designate the IP addresses of the DNS servers to DNS servers 1 to 4 1 The DNS servers manage networks DNS settings are required to search for the SMTP server
86. to b4 to 1 Abnormal complete type bit 7 Set whether or not the clock data setting is required at abnormal completion 00114 Abnormal complete type 0 Clock data setting is not required 00911 User Clock data is not stored in S1 11 to S1 17 when errors occur 1 Clock data setting is required Clock data is stored in S1 11 to S1 17 when errors occur Store the status at completion of an instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code 2 Channel used ee the local Designate the channel used by the local salon 1to8 User ee 1 to 8 channel Specify the programmable controller CPU of the access destination in the target station Setting value Description Control CPU The access destination is the Target station s CPU type same as that with O3FFu selected 00001 3 03D0s to 0303s O3F Fi Designate the network number of the target station 1 to 239 Network number S1 4 Target station network number 254 When 254 is designated in Jn The network designated 1 to 239 254 User by the valid module during other station access Designate the target station 1 Station number specification When the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 120 When the local station is not a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 64 1 to 120 1 5 Target station number 2 Specific group 81H to AOH User 814 to AOu All stations with the indicated group number only FFu clock da
87. to the setting data the ZNRD instruction is executed using the following fixed values Channel used by own station Channel 1 Arrival monitoring time monitoring time until instruction completion 10 seconds Number of resends for arrival monitoring timeout 5 times 3 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The ZNRD instruction can be executed when the target station is a 2 Q L QnA AnUCPU Access to an AnUCPU is available via MELSECNET 10 When reading data from the other station CPU module device with the ZNRD instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be read in other station CPU module S number of read points 1 lt last device number of host station CPU module gt x Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as S 3 The normal or abnormal read completion status is stored in the data link Functions 1 Local station Programmable controller CPU instruction execution result ZNRD instruction storage area address 207 If the read completion device D2 1 is on due to abnormal end read the error code stored in the area mentioned above and correct the error accordingly
88. with the same Network No accessing other stations in other networks or accessing Ethernet with different Network No and relaying from other networks to the Ethernet network system 3 The set target Ethernet module can be installed either at a communication request source station communication relay station or communication request destination station b Conversion processing of the Use together system 1 When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the communication request message is sent to the next station obtained by the table exchange system at first 2 If the IP address of the Ethernet module cannot be obtained by the table exchange system the IP address is obtained by the IP address computation system in order to send the communication request message 3 The response message response to the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and the data in the conversion table or the stored data The relationship between the Convert Format and definition of the Ethernet module installed station is as follows Ethernet module installed station definition Conversion method Communication request source station Communication relay station Communication request Relay receiving station Relay sending station destination station Automatic response system IP Address computation system Table exchange system Use together system
89. x2 The value stored in each head address shown in the table indicates the offset address 0H to nH from the head address of the buffer memory in which the applicable address is stored address 268BH to 3FFFH 1 The Ethernet module checks whether there is any incoming mail addressed to the local station in the mail server at the time interval set in Enquiry Interval under the e mail setting screen of a programming tool If there are incoming mails addressed to the local station the reception information is stored in the following areas of the buffer memory e Bit 15 is turned on in the mail information storage area see 1 above The number of receive mails on the mail server is stored in the receive mail count storage area address 5870n When more than one receive mails are stored on the mail server the receive mail information can be stored in the buffer memory in the same way as described above by designating Inquire in the MRECV instruction s control data item Receive mails can successively be read based on this stored information 2 Read receive mails stored on the mail server using the MRECV instruction Receive mails will accumulate on the mail server if the MRECV instruction is not executed 3 After executing the MRECV instruction e mails that have been read are deleted from the mail server Receive mails read will not remain on the mail server 4 If the Ethernet module has received e mail longer than the
90. 0 mode MELSECNET 10 AJ71LP21 G AJ71LR21 AJ71BR11 A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 3 AJ71QE71N3 T AJ71QE71N B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N T AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N3 T A1SJ71QE71N B5 A1SJ71QE71N B2 A1SJ71QE71N T A1SJ71QE71N B5T AJ71QE71 AJ71QE71 B5 A1SJ71QE71 B2 A1SJ71QE71 B5 3 QnA series Ethernet interface modules can act as relays between networks if the function version is B or later Verify the function version with the production date shown in the Date column of the rated plate which is attached to the side of the module Manufactured date Year last two digits Month two digits function version one digit 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 3 Settings for Accessing Other Stations This section explains the parameters and setting items that need to be set with a programming tool to access other stations via the Ethernet using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function 1 Network parameter 1 Network No group number station number station No etc for using the Ethernet module are set on this screen 2 Make sure to set the values by seeing the User s Manual Basic Station No lt gt IP information setting 1 The Ethernet s routing method correspondences of the Ethernet module s IP 2 address and Network No station number etc for using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network
91. 12 D13 D14 E71 Station 4 WRITE instruction communication request destination station Programmable controller CPU D50 D51 D52 D53 E71 A Station 3 M100 turns on upon write completion a Station 1 program READ instruction When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y40 to X Y5F X20 A _ _ _A k AY H81 DO Control data setting V command 0 be J ov HO D3 J mov K20 D4 J mov K4 D5 mov K20 D8 J mov K5 D9 X21 X59 H mov K5 D7 Read command JP READ J20 DO D10 D200 MO 3 in Processin d leti 1 H g program on read completion Me SASS RS is ii a aa a si f Processing program on normal completion mM A eo ee oe eek Tl Processing program on abnormal completion i ll mov D1 Dop 1 es q 4 29 Clock data setting is required Channel used by local station Target station s CPU type Control CPU Target station network number Target station number Arrival monitoring time 20 s Read data length 5 words Number of resend X59 Initial normal completion signal Performs error code reading etc 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b Station 2 programs SWRITE instruction When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y40 to X Y5F
92. 1E71 QCPU and LJ71E71 LCPU 4 a b c Set the login name and password for the external device to request login file transfer to the Ethernet module in order to use the FTP server function of the Ethernet module If the FTP login name is changed and invalid characters are entered QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 is set as the login name If the password is changed and invalid characters are entered QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 is set as the password Command input monitoring timer address 3BAH Default value 1800 0708H 15 min a b Set the monitoring time for the Ethernet module to monitor the command input time from the FTP client when it operates as the FTP server It is recommended to use the default value for this timer value as much as possible When changing the setting value determine the command input monitoring timer value upon consulting the administrator of the external device or system Designate the setting value in the range of lt 1H to 7FFFH 1 to 32767 gt 15 min at the default value of 1800 The FTP connection is disconnected if there is no command input from the FTP client side within the time designated by the command input monitoring timer value after the FTP client login When restarting the file transfer start over from the login operation again PLC monitoring timer address 3BBhH Default value 10 DOOAH 5 s a b c Set the monitoring time for the Ethernet module to m
93. 2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SEND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the SEND instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SEND instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS at completion Operation of the local station when the SEND instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program E e a oaee ON SEND instruction execution i i f is completed i SEND instruction CEB Onn ON Send receive OFF direction flag ON OFF i i Completion device _ gt _ Po r Abnormal ON completion 4 Normal Status display device OFF 5 When the instruction is executed using JP SEND GP SEND the send processing is executed only once when the send instruction flag switches from off to on at rise Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance
94. 20 D30 MO J X19 Initial normal completion signal MO Ra nee en ye T Processing program on instruction completion m ias o ear dE Processing program on normal completion i ie te ee UN Mi Processing program on abnormal completion i i Read error code etc mov D1 Mop i i 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 9 JP GP SEND This instruction sends data to another station s Q L QnACPU Applicable device Link direct device Intelligent Internal device y Index register Constant File register JOO function module Others Zn K H S1 S2 ma device UTGO Instruction Executing symbol condition Command PEE r SEND S1 S2 Command o GP SEND st S2 Setting data Set data Description Set by Data type Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 Jn 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Un Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal S1 Head device of the local station that stores the control data ES Device name S2 Head device of the local station that stores the send data aa Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of NES D the instruction System Bit D 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for eac
95. 20 and on Create send data at D200 and on IH Send the e mail ZP MSEND uo D20 D200 M10 Processing program when normal completion Processing program when abnormal completion M10 M11 M11 2 Execution timing of the instruction Initial processing E mail sending Initial normal completion signal A X19 MSEND instruction MSEND instruction completion device oe i iz Abnormal completion MSEND instruction completion device 1 Normal completion abnormal completion 1 Start the local station programmable controller The parameters for the e mail function are stored in the Ethernet module 2 Execute the MSEND instruction The e mail designated with the MSEND instruction is sent to the mail server 3 When the e mail sending to the send mail server is completed the MSEND instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns on the error code is stored in the control data completion status S1 1 For details on the causes of errors see the User s Manual Basic 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Sample program The following shows a sample program for sending e mail by the programmable controller CPU Perform e mail transmission processing the send command X20 The contents of the send data are shown in 4 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are
96. 2001 SH NA 080010 D Apr 2003 SH NA 080010 E Reflect the contents of the function version B Put Windows base software products together from Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEC series to Mitsubishi integrated FA software MELSOFT series Standardize the name from software package GPP function to product name GX Developer Correction Entire manual change MELSECNET 10H to MELSECNET H Contents About Manuals About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Chapter 1 entire Section 1 2 POINT Section 2 1 2 5 2 2 6 1 2 6 2 2 7 1 2 7 2 Section 3 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 Section 4 1 4 3 4 5 2 Section 5 1 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 1 5 6 1 2 2 5 6 2 5 6 4 Section 6 2 to 6 8 6 9 POINT before the function 6 10 to 6 14 Addition Entire manual add the explanation on MELSECNET H remote I O station Section 4 3 4 Chapter 5 POINT Added the description of the model QJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module Additional model QJ71E71 100 Correction About Manuals The Manual s Usage and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 1 1 2 Section 3 3 2 3 c Section 4 2 5 4 3 3 4 4 Table 4 7 Section 5 4 5 5 c Section 6 2 6 3 6 9 POINT 6 13 Function 6 14 Function Addition Chapter 2 entire Section 5 1 5 6 4 Correction Section 1 2 Section 2 1 2 3 2 4 2 7 2 4 POINT 2 8 Section 4 5 1 3 Chapter 5 POINT Section 5 1 1 5 4 4 5 5
97. 3 Al Saad Al Alee St Culliganlaan 3 Wolweverstraat 22 EG Sarayat Maadi Cairo BE 1831 Diegem NL 2984 CD Ridderkerk Phone 20 0 2 235 98 548 Phone 32 0 2 17176430 Phone 31 0 180 46 60 04 Fax 20 0 2 235 96 625 Fax 32 0 2 717 64 31 Fax 31 0 180 44 23 55 5 LAN amp GAVISH Ltd ISRAEL Koning amp Hartman b v BELGIUM Koning amp Hartman b v NETHERLANDS 94 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie Woluwelaan 31 Haarlerbergweg 21 23 IL 49001 Petah Tiqva BE 1800 Vilvoorde NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 Phone 32 0 2 125702 40 Phone 31 0 20 5877600 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 Fax 32 0 2 257 02 49 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 GIRIT CELADON LTD ISRAEL INEA RBT d 0 0 BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 12 H aomanut Street Aleja Lipa 56 Postboks 487 IL 42505 Netanya BA 71000 Sarajevo NO 3002 Drammen Phone 972 0 9 863 39 80 Phone 387 0 33 1921164 Phone 47 0 32 1243000 Fax 972 0 9 885 2430 Fax 387 0 33 524 539 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 gt CEG INTERNATIONAL LEBANON AKHNATON BULGARIA Fonseca S A PORTUGAL Cebaco Center Block A Autostrade DORA 4 Andrei Ljapchev Blvd PO Box 21 R Jo o Francisco do Casal 87 89 Lebanon Beirut BG 1756 Sofia PT 3801 997 Aveiro Esgueira Phone 961 0 1 240 430 Phone 359 0 2 18176000 Phone 351 0 234 303 900 Fax 961 0 1 240 438 Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 Fax 351 0 234 303 910 INEA RBT d 0 0 CROATIA Sirius Trading amp S
98. 301 MELTRADE Kft HUNGARY Omni Ray AG SWITZERLAND Fert utca 14 m Sch rli 5 HU 1107 Budapest CH 8600 Diibendorf Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Phone 41 0 44 802 28 80 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Fax 41 0 44 802 28 28 Beijer Electronics SIA LATVIA GTS TURKEY Ritausmas iela 23 Bayraktar Bulvari Nutuk Sok No 5 i LV 1058 Riga TR 34775 Yukar Dudullu Umraniye ISTANBUL Phone 371 0 784 2280 Phone 90 0 216 526 39 90 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Fax 90 0 216 526 3995 Beijer Electronics UAB LITHUANIA CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE Savanoriu Pr 187 4 B M Raskovoyi St LT 02300 Vilnius UA 02660 Kiev Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
99. 5 1 File Transfer Functions The file transfer functions hereinafter called FTP server of the Ethernet module to read write the files in the Q LCPU on the external device side are explained The Ethernet module supports the FTP File Transfer Protocol server function which uses the protocol to transfer files between external devices lt functions as the file server for the files in the Q LCPU The FTP commands are used to direct data transfers in file units The external device with the FTP client functions can easily access read write the user created files in the Q LCPU directly using the Ethernet module FTP server functions 1 Reading a file from the Q LCPU download Reading function for storing the Q LCPU files in the external device 2 Writing a file to the Q LCPU upload Writing function for registering the file in the external device to the Q LCPU 3 Scanning Q LCPU files Scanning function for checking the files registered in the Q LCPU from the external device With these Ethernet module FTP server functions all user files in the Q LCPU such as parameters sequence programs and data files can be accessed using the FTP commands from the external device Programmable controller CPU FTP server External device FTP client Programmable controller CPU Ethernet Parameter Program Storage file Data Read E Write l Ethernet 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFE
100. 9 of the RECV instruction varies depending on the version See the User s Manual Basic Specifying a length value outside the setting range will cause a 4101 error OPERATION ERROR on the local station 1 This instruction reads the data sent by a station connected to other networks or Ethernet that were specified with the network number and station number of the control data from the local station s Ethernet module The data is sent using the SEND instruction When data is received from the send station the receive data is stored in the channel of the local station designated with the send station and the corresponding bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 of the Ethernet module buffer memory turns on The received data is read from the receive data storage channel using the ON status of the corresponding bit of the RECV instruction execution request area to time the reading operations When reading the receive data from the Ethernet module is completed the completion device designated by D2 turns on 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module D1 Channel 1 D1 Channel 1 SEND S 2 e Channeln e gt e iia Maracas Channeln gt Channel 8 Channel 8 Ethernet 2 3 4 The instructions for Ethernet module cannot be execute
101. 90 Sant Cugat del Vall s Barcelona Phone 902 131121 34 935653131 Fax 34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 6100 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 EUROPE FRANCE IRELAND ITALY POLAND RUSSIA SPAIN JAPAN USA y MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GEVA AUSTRIA ALFATRADE Ltd MALTA TOO Kazpromavtomatika KAZAKHSTAN Wiener Stra e 89 99 Paola Hill Ul Zhambyla 28 AT 2500 Baden Malta Paola PLA 1702 KAZ 100017 Karaganda Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 356 0 21 697 816 Phone 7 7212 50 1000 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 356 0 21 697 817 Fax 7 7212 5011 50 TECHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS srl MOLDOVA Oktyabrskaya 19 Off 705 bld Traian 23 1 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2060 Kishinev Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 C SYSTEMS LTD EGYPT ESCO DRIVES amp AUTOMATION BELGIUM HIFLEX AUTOM TECHNIEK B V NETHERLANDS 9
102. 960 Word 6 1 to 960 User When reading from QnACPU 1 to 480 Word A A A E AN S1 10 Not used Store the valid invalid status of the data in S1 12 to S1 17 This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is S1 11 Clock set flag System normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L The clock data upon abnormal end is stored in BCD This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 12 b15 to b8 b7 to bO to Clock data set only if an error Month 011 to 12k Year 00x to 99x Last 2 digits occurs S1 15 Hour 00H to 23H Date 01 to 31H Second 00 to 59H Minute 00H to 59x Year 00 to 99x First 2 digits Day of the week 00H to 06x 00x Sun to 06h Sat Stores the network number of the station that detected an abnormality 7 This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 S1 16 oe detection network No is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No Stores the station number of the station that detected an abnormality This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0
103. ABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 1 The CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network No group No and station No for the Ethernet module in the data link instruction setting data designate the network No group No and station No assigned to the Ethernet module by the Setting the number of Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET cards indicated in the User s Manual Basic This operation is required for a Q LCPU to access other stations with the Ethernet network system identified equivalent as other network systems 2 For details of the data designation method for the data link instruction see chapter 6 3 A maximum of eight instructions can be performed simultaneously as long as the channel number 1 to 8 designated in each instruction control data do not overlap with each other NWARNING Precautions for data link instruction 1 In a system where AnUCPU coexist never execute the following instruction from the Q L QnACPU to other station s ANUCPU The AnUCPU that has been executed such instruction results in MAIN CPU DOWN or WDT ERROR and may stop the operation 1 SEND 2 READ 3 SREAD 4 WRITE 5 SWRITE 6 REQ 2 When accessing for all Q L QnACPU stations on the MELSECNET 10 including programmable controller CPU other than Q L QnACPU perform the access using the group No designation 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMM
104. ABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 5 Data Sending Receiving This section explains the arbitrary data sending receiving function instruction format and programs using the data send receive instructions SEND RECV and RECVS instructions 1 The SEND RECV and RECVS instructions are used for sending and receiving arbitrary data to from the programmable controller CPU with which communicate is being performed 2 Data sending is performed using the SEND instruction and data receiving is performed using the RECV or RECVS instruction The RECV instruction and the RECVS instruction are used differently as follows a The RECV instruction is used in the receiving processing in the main program The main program reads from the RECV instruction executing request area in the buffer memory and executes the RECV instruction using a switch from off to on of a bit corresponding to the data receiving channel number as a trigger b The RECVS instruction is used in the receiving processing in an interrupt program An interrupt program is started when data is received from the programmable controller CPU with which communication is being performed to enable receive data reading to the programmable controller CPU To start the interrupt program set the parameters on the following screens of a programming tool 1 Network Parameter Ethernet Interrupt Settings screen Set the control number SI on
105. B20 B30 B40 0030 0031 0032 0033 CR LF The spaces and lines between device numbers and device values are inserted for the purpose of explanation They are not recorded in the attached file 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 When sending data as main text lt When data format is CSV gt e Target data values are converted to 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII codes and recorded from the higher byte H side of the values e The device name and display device No are recorded for each setting device e If multiple word data is to be processed insert a comma between each word 4 byte ASCII code data Insert a CR code ODH and a LF code O0An for each setting device range or 8 word data Example In case of M15 to MO 00011 M31 to M16 0002n WO 001Ah W1 002Bh For M15 to MO M15 to M12 to M8 to M4 to MO 1 For the main text of e mail WO W1 CR LF 001A 002B CR LF DO D9 CR LF 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 CR LF 0019 001A CR LF MO M79 CR LF 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 CR LF X10 X3F CR LF 0060 0061 0062 CR LF B10 B4F CR LF 0030 0031 0032 0033 CR LF The dotted boarder lines between the device values in the above figure are for explanation purpose only They are not actually recorded in the main text 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L lt When data format is character strings binary gt The device name and display device No are recor
106. CPU module used b Number of resends Set 3 times App 6 App 6 APPENDIX Setting target Communication request source station MELSEC Q L c Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent The processing time can be shortened by setting the arrival monitoring time shorter e Setting 100ms for the setting unit of arrival monitoring time Sequence scan time of the CPU module St Setting value Processing time Control data for the data link instruction Arrival monitoring time unit bit 8 of S1 0 In increments of 100ms 1 Arrival monitoring time 2 3 300ms 200ms Number of resends Communication request destination station Response time of the CPU module Rt 120ms 30ms Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent by the number of resends 20ms x 2 300ms x 3 120ms 1060ms 20ms x 2 200ms x 3 30ms 670ms 1060ms 670ms 1 Values in parentheses are assumed that service processing is set to 4 times refer to 2 a in this section 2 Since the arrival monitoring time value may be rounded off add 100ms Setting target Communication request source station Using the default for Ethernet module parameter setting 1s for arrival monitoring time unit Sequence scan time of the CPU module St Setting value Pr
107. CTION MELSEC Q L 2 WRITE instruction SWRITE instruction Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END Write command 2 a a Write completion device Device specified with D2 em Local station programmable controller CPU 1 1 scan l I Write completion device D2 1 device OFF Write data storage device Device specified with S2 l Se Channel 1 i module E a nea nae A A AO a is o vg O ee a a Se Ss ee E A a ee E E A E Ni A SS SEE a a we eee ee oy wide een wr fee Pee gry g yt ee Ma eee ey ws iw yeahs ge ee Peed bent yt wet ee tee A Ethernet i module Sequence scan i l l l r Write data storage device Target station Device specified with D1 l l ji l l l programmable controller CPU Write notify device Device specified with D3 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b When abnormal completion 1 READ instruction SREAD instruction Sequence scan 0 END H 0 END 0 END 70 END H0 END Read command f l l Local station programmable controller CPU Read completion device Device specified with D2 Read completion device D2 1 device Completion status Error cod S1 1 device ae Ie ee A A A a AE O ee yy S a rra i Channel 1 i modul
108. D instruction is 10 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Set data Setting range Set by b15 tob12 to b8 b7 bO o 2 1 1 Complete type bit 7 Designate whether or not the setting of the clock data is required at abnormal completion 0 Clock data setting is not required The clock data at error occurrence is not set in S1 11 to S1 15 1 Clock data setting is required The clock data at error occurrence is set in S1 11 to S1 15 2 Send data format bit 12 to bit 8 Designate the format of data to be sent When sending data as an attached file oia ori oro vs 09 oaatomar 7 0 1 0 0 0 ASCII data converted from binary Execution complete type to ASCII As described in Send data format CSV data converted from binary the left 0 1 o 0 1 to CSV When sending data as the main text b12 p11 b10 b9 b8 Datafomat Precautions when designating the main text of e mail The setting of bit 11 to bit 8 is invalid when the main text is designated Designate the main text using ASCII characters in a sequence program the Ethernet module does not convert it to ASCII The following binary code data is treated as control codes ODOAu Line feed code CR LF 00x End of the main text It is recommended to limit the data written in one line of the main text to 78 characters or less Be sure to add a line feed code CR LF ODOAu at the
109. D2 Execution completion device D2 1 device Completion status S1 1 device Ethernet module Target station error 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION 3 Instruction examples MELSEC Q L a A program that writes the clock data 8 30 00 to the Q L QnACPU of station number 13 using network number 7 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F Station No 13 Station No 1 Programmable E71 REQ instruction controller CPU _ ____ communication a E request Channel destination a station T i 1 i Deeteadl Programmable controller CPU E71 Network No 7 X20 tht nov Control data setting command MOV mov mov mov mov Mov X21 ttt MoV Request data setting command mov mov mov mov X22 X19 mov Write command JP REQ J7 DO D20 MO H91 DO K1 D2 H3FF D3 K7 4 K13 D5 K20 8 K6 9 H11 20 H1 D21 38 D22 H3008 D24 0 D25 K5 D7 30 MO Clock data setting required Channel used by the local station Target station s CPU type Control CPU Target station network number Target station number Arrival monitoring time 20 s Request data length 6 words Request type Subrequest type Change pattern Hour minute 8 30 Second
110. F FF FF 00H Conversion setup conversion information address 229H to 3A8H a The conversion setting is required to obtain the IP address from the Network No and station number using the table exchange system b If the local station is an Ethernet module and the next station to which the communication request response message is passed to access other station is also an Ethernet module designate the Network No station number and IP address of the next station s Ethernet module Specify the values set on the network parameter setting screen c Designate the Network No in the range of 1 to 239 1H to EFH and the station number in the range of 1 to 64 1H to 40h 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 1 Communication between the Ethernet module and Q LCPU is performed according to the network No and station No and communication between two Ethernet modules are performed according to the IP address and UDP port number Thus the Ethernet module must convert the data below The network No and station No of other networks gt IP address and UDP port number of Ethernet 2 The Station No lt gt IP information are required when other stations are accessed via other Ethernet network systems and must be registered in all the Q LCPU stations in which the Ethernet modules are connected 3 The Station No lt gt IP information should be set on the Station No lt gt IP Information screen and
111. F ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION Instruction Details Writes data to another station s word device x4 With SWRITE the completion device on the target station can be turned on E Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module N W module Ethernet module N W module Programmable controller CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 WRITE SWRITE See Section 4 6 Performs remote RUN STOP to other station Performs clock data read and write for other stations Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module NW module Ethernet module Programmable N W module controller CPU Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 See Section 4 8 Instruction execution station Local station MELSEC Q L Target station Station type Ethernet Ethernet module Station type Target station type Ethernet Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster st
112. Files with read only attribute and files that are locked from another device or function cannot be deleted The file attributes can be changed using the FTP operation command quote change Files can be deleted only from the Q LCPU program memory or the RAM area of the memory card or SD memory card After deleting a file with the Q LCPU in RUN status do not read or write the data of the deleted file by the sequence program Doing so may result in an operation error detected in the Q LCPU Precautions for FTP password When forgetting the FTP password reset FTP parameters in the following procedure 1 2 Read the parameters from Q LCPU to the programming tool Click the Default button in the Setting the Ethernet FTP parameters screen and then return all the parameters to the default values Set the FTP parameters again Write the set parameters to the Q LCPU in the Write to PLC screen To open the Write to PLC screen select Online gt Write to PLC Enable the parameters by powering off and on or resetting the CPU module 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 6 FTP Commands The FTP operation commands on the FTP client side external devices supported by the Ethernet module FTP server are described 5 6 1 File designation method The file designation method in the FTP operation command from the FTP client side is explained Designation descriptions The part with the
113. GRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 5 Channels used by the ZNRD and ZNWR instructions The ZNRD and ZNWR instructions for Ethernet modules are executed using the following channels of the target Ethernet module ZNRD Channel 1 ZNWR Channel 2 Do not use the channels used by the ZNRD and ZNWR instructions listed above for other data link instructions in an Ethernet module mounted station that executes the ZNRD and ZNWR instructions Also do not execute data link instructions from other stations on the channels listed above in an Ethernet module mounted station that executes the ZNRD and ZNWR instructions 1 See Chapter 3 for details of the following when performing other station access using the data link instructions The accessible range and accessible stations of the other stations e Setting to perform other station access e Other station access procedure 2 The communication using the data link instructions on the Ethernet is performed with UDP IP When executing each data link instruction except for ZNRD and ZNWR it is recommended to designate a value greater than 1 to the number of retries setting area of the control data storage device See the reference manual for each network regarding the link data send receive processing and processing time in data communication with the programmable controller CPU of another station via other networks For details about data desig
114. HE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Flow of the e mail The diagram shown below illustrates the flow of e mails from the local station s Ethernet module to the external device after the monitor values match with the news conditions Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module Status 1 Read monitoring 4 information lt Device value 2 Check news conditions Mail server No match a Match o External i 4 device 3 Send mail 1 Reads the monitoring information such as status and device values of the programmable controller CPU 2 Checks whether the monitoring information read and the news conditions set by the user match Checks match mismatch of the news conditions 3 Sends an e mail when the monitored values match with the news conditions Multiple news conditions may be set so that an e mail can be sent notified when any of the conditions matches See Section 2 9 1 Set the CPU inquiry time interval used by the Ethernet module to monitor the programmable controller CPU considering the interval of change time in the monitoring target After a news condition match occurs the Ethernet module must confirm the mismatches of other news conditions for the same monitoring target The next e mail can be sent only after the Ethernet module confirms the mismatches of these news conditions The Subject of e mail which is sent when the notification conditions ma
115. INK INSTRUCTION Sending side programmable controller CPU Ethernet module Receiving side programmable controller CPU MELSEC Q L 2 Instruction execution timing for receive processing by the main program a When normal completion O ae ae II ee es es ir ake A E E ae tea A IAS 4 SEND With arrival confirmation l Sequence scan 0 ENDH O END O ENDE HO END o END I I I I I I I Send command i l l l i l i Send completion device i Device specified with D f Send completion device D 1 device l A a Hap eae ese A AA E E E E E Ge E E E E ad Eee aOR ENO RS LORS EE SOL Ie PGS Soe RN ed Lee eee Naan A SRE Rae eR AI EEE er Re ee nee ayaa Sel ONO 4 Channel 1 i Die as pep eee o A eee ee ee eee j Data Storage sending complete A A E E AA 4 oo o o l i Channel 3 i SAS BeB Bee e eee aa SSeS eee SS GOB SSeS ee Se fe eee Se Bee eee ee SS SS SSB See SS SESS al eae IONE SEs Raa A fee OES ROE AA A A een ay Ona ORS eee ane eee Regence eS O 4 HIHRECVE i Sequence scan 0 ENDO ENDH0 END 0 END o END I i 1 f i i 1 RECV instruction execution l request flag 1 a i 1 l ji i Receive completion device Device specified with D2 I e a Receive completion device l D2 1 device OFF l Receive data storage device Receive data Devi
116. IR End Cancel Setting item Description of setting Setting range Selections Send Mail Address Set the mail address of the transmission destination Up to 256 characters News Specification Select whether or not to set news Execute News e No Execute a Send mail address 1 Designate the mail addresses of a maximum of 16 external devices to which mails are sent from the local station s Ethernet module Only one e mail address can be specified for each area 2 Inthe send e mail address setting sequentially set up e mail addresses starting from No 1 To delete an e mail address with a mid setting number specify dummy e mail addresses before that address If it is preceded by any empty e mail address areas subsequent setting numbers and areas will move forward to fill in any empty numbers and areas after each setting so the setting numbers will change 3 When sending MSEND instruction e mail by the programmable controller CPU specify these setting numbers 1 through 16 in the control data b News specification Designate whether or not to send the news information set with the CPU monitoring function Explanation News Specification For more details on the news settings see Section 2 9 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 7 Sending Receiving E mail Attached Files by the Programmable Controller CPU This section explains how to send and receive attached files of e mail using the de
117. MITSUBISHI Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSECEL MELSECL MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 LJ71E71 100 e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read before starting use Before using this product please read this manual introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the user s manual for the CPU module to use In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION e P AN WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury l A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage 7 ee a es a ee es A ea ee ee es es ee es a es a es ae ee a ee es Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please store this manual in a safe place and make it accessible when required Always forward it to the end user Precautions for using the MELSEC Q series Ethernet interface module Design Precautions A WARNING e For the opera
118. MMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Instruction execution timing a When normal completion Sequence scan 0 END 0 END 0 END 0 END 70 END if 1 I i I I ij 1 l l I l ij i Execution command T i Local station MS i 1 l l I l f l l 1 l I I if if l I I l l programmable controller CPU Execution completion device Device specified with D2 1 scan l e i Execution completion device D2 1 device OFF Bree ge ag at et ig ON eC Cd ghee oo em ee rap he wey RA AI RAI Gb ig ne at ee OP Le Reg a ge Ge Gere ee I 1 i ee ae Channel 1 module l E E E E PE EE da NDA A E E E ARA EAEE SN E O IINA A A S E D E E E E EEEE e IA MM a AMA AMM MA IA MM Ethernet i module i I I ij Sequence scan 0 0 ENDFF0 END Target station i programmable controller CPU Clock data read write 1 i Remote RUN STOP i E E E E T E S osas ee 4 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b When abnormal completion Sequence scan 0 END o END o END 0 END 0 END 1 1 1 Execution command f T T l ij 1 Local station i programmable Execution completion device controller CPU Device specified with
119. Manual Communication methods and control procedures through the MC protocol for the external devices to SH 080008 read and write data from to the programmable controller CPU using the serial communication 13JF89 module Ethernet interface module Sold separately The Manual s Use and Structure O How to use this manual In this manual explanations are given for each special function of the Ethernet modules QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 and LJ71E71 100 Please use this manual using the following key items below as a reference 1 To learn about an overview of the special functions e Chapter 1 provides an overview of each of the special functions available for the Ethernet modules 2 To use the e mail transmission reception function and the programmable controller CPU monitoring function e Section 2 2 describes the environment in which e mails can be used Section 2 6 illustrates the screens for parameter settings with a programming tool to use the e mail function Section 2 9 describes the parameter settings to monitor the status of the programmable controller CPU 3 To communicate with programmable controller CPUs of other stations via a network module or an Ethernet module Section 3 2 describes the accessible range and accessible stations when accessing other stations via the Ethernet modules Section 3 3 describes the parameter settings using a programming tool to communicate data with the programmable
120. NIX Sends the attached file in ASCII format The Ethernet module converts the attached file Ethernet module from binary to ASCII asc Personal Note that some restrictions apply to receive an computer UNIX attached file in ASCII format sent with the MSEND instruction by an Ethernet module Refer to a Sends the attached file in CSV format CSV The Ethernet module converts the attached file from binary to CSV gt csv Select binary format or ASCII format for communications between Ethernet modules To use ASCII format set a data size the size the MRECV instruction receives after conversion into ASCII within 6144 words The attached file of the MSEND instruction will be sent as is The name of the attached file is mmddhhss bin system date bin mm Month dd Date hh Hour ss minute Designate either binary format ASCII format or CSV format when a PC UNIX receives e mail sent from an Ethernet module The attached file of the MSEND instruction will be sent in the designated format 1 When binary format is designated The name of the attached file is mmddhhss bin system date bin mm month dd day hh hour ss minute 2 When ASCII format is designated The name of the attached file is mmddhhss asc system date asc mm month dd day hh hour ss minute 3 When CSV format is designated The name of the attached file is mmddhhss csv system date csv mm month dd day hh hour ss minute For details on how to
121. NK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 5 1 Data sending receiving for receive with the main program SEND RECV This section explains the format and program examples of the SEND and RECV instructions that are used to send receive data between the programmable controller CPUs For more details see Sections 6 5 and 6 9 1 Instruction format a SEND instruction Network number designation Send command JP Execution Hesse Tr Ten Tes eee Network module Ethernet module start I O signal designation Send command GP Execution o GP SEND S1 S2 dunngeani N Setting details Setting range Network number Network designated in the valid module for other station access Local station network number Start I O signal of the local station network module Ethernet module Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is expressed by three digits Control data storage head device Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device 2 the control data Send data storage head device Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the send data 2 Send completion device Designate the device to turn on one scan when the send Bit device 1 is complete Word device bit designation 3 OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Error 1 Bit device ere X Y M L F V B 2 Word device rete T C D W ST R ZR 3 Word device bit designation Word
122. NOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L BS Setting details 1 to 239 Network number 254 Network designated in a valid module for other station access Local station network number Start I O signal of the local station network module Ethernet module l B DS 0 to FEn Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is expressed by three digits Control data storage head device S1 Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the control data Read data storage head device target station S2 Designate the head device of the target station that stores Word device i the data to read Read data storage head device local station D1 Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the data to read Read completion device local station Designate the device of the local station to turn on one i 1 i Bit device D2 scan when the read is complete Jn Un Word device bit designation 7 OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Abnormal Read notify device target station Designate the device of the target station to turn on one 03 scan when the read is complete Bit device ci l o 4 Can recognize data of target station has been read from Word device bit designation other station OFF Incomplete ON Complete 2 Word device a a da T C D W ST R ZR 3 Word device errr rer ere Perr eer cr T C D W ST SD
123. P in the Q LCPU The temporary files are automatically created in the designated drive during the file write put or mput and the file name is changed to the designated file name after the operation is completed The xxx in the temporary file name FTP_Ixxx TMP is the upper three digits of the four digits representing the Ethernet module s I O signals from the Q LCPU The temporary file is automatically deleted when the file write is successfully completed line is shut down during transfer or a file capacity error occurs with the Q LCPU The temporary work file may remain in the designated drive when the Q LCPU power is disconnected or reset during the file write When the temporary file remains in the drive delete the file using the FTP command When file deletion and file writing are repeated while the Q LCPU is in RUN status the file size must be fixed in advance If a file is deleted and writing of another file larger than the deleted one is attempted a 402B error will occur disabling the file writing 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 6 Precautions when deleting files 1 2 When determining the timing to delete files consider the system operation as a whole including the functions of Q LCPU and a programming tool The parameter file and program file can not be deleted during the Q LCPU is performing RUN Delete these files after setting the Q LCPU to the STOP status
124. P server function can be performed from any external device with Ethernet module on the Ethernet When the router relay function is used the external device on the Ethernet connected via the designated router can perform FTP functions File transfers can be performed from the following external device with the symbol Ethernet 1 Router Relay processing miii External device E Ethernet 2 y CC Link IE Field Network SSSSSSSSH MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 i Ethernet 3 SSDS File transfers cannot be performed from the external device on the Ethernet 3 which is connected via CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 3 FTP Parameter Settings for File Transfer from a Programming Tool This section explains how to set the Ethernet FTP parameters for the file transfer FTP Open the Setting the Ethernet FTP Parameter screen in the network parameter screen of a programming tool For how to open the screen refer to the operating manual for the programming tool used Network Parameter Setting the Ethernet FTP Paramet DE FTP Parameters FTP not Used y Login Name omen Password Current oOo New Command Input 1800 500ms Monitoring Timer 1 32767 PLC Moni
125. Q In the following data link instructions the target station s CPU type can be specified S1 3 Specification of control standby system or system A B in the redundant system is available e READ SREAD e WRITE SWRITE REQ The data length can be specified up to 960 words in the following data link instructions Increased data length of data link SEND instructions 480 to 960 words e RECV RECVS e READ SREAD e WRITE SWRITE Using the following data link instructions arrival monitoring time can be set in 100ms increments Specifying target station s CPU type in data link instructions Setting the arrival monitoring time of the data link instruction in 100ms Chapter 6 READ SREAD instructions e WRITE SWRITE instructions 1 In a multiple network system when transferring data exceeding 480 words to a station of another network No specify the Q or L series models to all of the request source relay station and request target increments 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION 2 1 E mail Function The e mail function sends and receives CPU information programmable controller CPU status and device values to from PCs or programmable controller CPUs in remote locations via the Internet 2 The following two methods are available to send receive e mail using this function 1 Sending receiving e mail by the programmable controller CPU Executed by a sequence program
126. R FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 1 1 FTP server support functions of the Ethernet module The FTP commands supported by Ethernet module when it serves as the FTP server are indicated below The Write enable setting and Write disable setting columns in the table indicate the settings in the Ethernet Operation Setting screen of a programming tool checking the checkbox next to Enable Online Change Write enable setting check the checkbox Write disable setting do not check the checkbox The Remote password indicates whether the instruction can be executed when the FTP communication port is designated as a port subject to the remote password check in the remote password setting parameter for the Q LCPU of the station where the Ethernet module is connected See the User s Manual Basic for the remote password 1 Client side user interface command list supported by Ethernet module Programmable controller CPU status Remote password Command Function During During RUN While Remarks Write enable Write disable While locked STOP unlocked 5 setting setting binary 3 Notify to transfer without converting file be pecore ane a ect wth FTP sever ft 7 e CT A oe CI CI o o o f x all P TETAS MI II ICI EI IE O TT E gt x Imdelete Delete the file of a CPU module A A TC IC CI dir Store the file information of a CPU module into the coat file OE rae bs sp EIE ms Store the filename ofaCPUmodule
127. RECV instruction e Ethernet modules with serial numbers where the first 5 digits are 03101 or less Different methods are used for converting Subject data at send and reception See Section 2 1 1 2 e When sending Encodes the Subject and then send it e When receiving Receives the Subject without decoding it 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 4 E mail Specifications The following table lists the specifications of the e mail function Item Specification Attached file 6 k words X 1 Main text 960 words X 1 When sending Sends either a file as attachment or main text select one When receiving Received a file as attachment Subject Us ASCII format or ISO 2022 JP Base 64 Attached file format MIME format MIME Version 1 0 Binary ASCII CSV can be selected Data of attached file format File name XXXX bin binary XXXX asc ASCII XXXX csv CSV CSV Comma Separated Value Transmission Cannot be divided only one file can be sent received Division of attached file If any divided files are received only the first file will be received and the remaining files will be discarded Data size Data transfer method specifications Transmission Subject Base 64 7 bits When sending encode Main text 7 bits data Attached file Base 64 Subject Does not decode Main text Cannot be received When receiving decode Attached file Base 64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable If e
128. TE ZNRD The abbreviation for J ZNRD and JP ZNRD ZNWR The abbreviation for J ZNWR and JP ZNWR 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q L 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the special functions of an Ethernet interface module hereinafter abbreviated as Ethernet module When applying the following program examples to the actual system make sure to examine the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems This chapter describes an overview of the special functions that are available for the Ethernet module 1 1 Overview 1 Send receive e mails Details are explained in Chapter 2 This function allows the transmission and reception of a maximum of 6k words of CPU information as the main text or attached file of e mail to from computers and programmable controller CPUs via the Internet Furthermore by setting the automatic notification the Ethernet module sends e mail when the notification conditions set by the user match for the transmission from programmable controllers Internet network Public line Internet service provider Internet service provider Mail server 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q L 2 Communicate with a programmable controller in another station via other networks Details are explained in Chapter 3 This function enables accessing other stations via multiple networks in the network system shown below This function is used f
129. TP Client eee 5 7 5 5 Precautions when Using the File Transfer Functions eceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeeeaeeeaeeats 5 12 9 6 FTP Commands A ee hea a ea hee aa 5 16 5 6 1 File designation method irakiene eaea EEEE A aE RE EARR 5 16 5 6 2 O ECPU User flesta a aa iia 5 19 5 6 3 Response A 5 20 5 6 4 FTP operation command ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeececeecaceeseaeeeaeescaeeeeaeeeseneeseaeeeceeeeieeeteaeesseeteneeess 5 21 6 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 0 cee eceeceeeceeeeeeeeteeeteeesenesenetenesenesenesenetenetenteneteaes 6 1 6 2 ZP MRE CW EE E E Aa nae ee ec ad es ae eee A 6 3 6 3 ZP MSEND vested ene eee ean einen cd 6 8 6 4 IP GPIREAD lt a tase tit cae etd ats ai eres nai dace ai A do eae ede tet ete 6 13 6 5 JP GP RECV for the Main Program ceccceccseceseceeeeeeeeteeeseeeseeeseeeeeeseeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaesenetaeseneeeaes 6 19 6 6 Z RECVS for Interrupt Programs cccceceseceseceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeseeeseceseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseneseaesenseaeseneeaaes 6 24 A 13 A 13 6 7 J P G P REQ Remote RUN STOP sssssssssssssssssssessssssssssesssessssseessssssssssessessesivsessssssuissssssssieesseesseee 6 28 6 8 J P G P REQ Clock Data Read Write sine raaa aeae eee ea eaa aaa 6 34 G29 RN E S N B EE EEEE E E E E E ET 6 37 6 10 JP GP SREAD citrato ede 6 46 6 11 JP IGP S WRITE 20203 ach a A A A A A 6 51 6 12 JP GPAWRITE A A a
130. U Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU LCPU LO2CPU LO2CPU P LO2SCPU L26CPU L26CPU BT L26CPU PBT Safety CPU 1 lasoo1cPu Q2ACPU Q2ACPU S1 Q2ASCPU Q2ASCPU S1 Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 Q3ACPU Q4ACPU Redundant CPU Q4ARCPU A1NCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 A3NCPU A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 AJACPU ACPU A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU A4UCPU A1SCPU A1SJCPU S3 A1SHCPU QCPU A mode A1SJHCPU A2SCPU A2SHCPU A2ZASCPU AZASCPU S1 A0J2HCPU Q02CPU A QO2HCPU A QO6HCPU A x1 The safety CPU can be used only as a request target station and cannot be used as a relay station 2 CC Link IE Field Network Ir IT Head module LJ72GF15 T2 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 se MELSECNET E QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25GE QJ72BR15 Remote O station MELSECNET 10 Remote l O station Universal model QCPU AJ72QLP25 AJ72QBR15 2 A1SJ72QLP25 A1SJ72QBR15 AJ72LP25 G AJ72BR15 2 Data can be read written from to the buffer memory of an intelligent function module in a MELSECNET 10 remote I O station 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L b Modules that can act as relays between networks communication relay stations AO ome OOO CC Link IE Controller Network QJ71GP21 SX QJ71GP21S SX CC Link IE Field Network QJ71GF11 T2 LJ71GF11 T2 QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21GE QJ71BR11 QU71NT11B pein et MELSECNET H mode QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21GE QJ71BR11 MELSECNET 1
131. U module or assigning all of the 32K points of the file register ZR to the expansion data register D Other station Host CPU module CPU module DO Expansion data register Specify within DO to 12287 Data register D12287 ZR12287 ZR12288 Specify within ZR12288 to 32767 ZR32767 1 File register with 32K points or more is required for the host CPU The number of steps for the READ instruction is 9 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Set data Setting range Set by b15 to b8 b7 to bO lo als o 1 1 Abnormal complete type bit 7 Set whether or not the clock data setting is required at abnormal completion 0 Clock data setting is not required Clock data is not stored in S1 11 to S81 17 when Abnormal complete type errors occur 1 Clock data setting is required Clock data is stored in S1 11 to S1 17 when errors occur 2 Arrival monitoring time unit bit 8 Set a unit for arrival monitoring time Set the arrival monitoring time to S1 8 0 Increments of 1s 1 Increments of 100ms Store the status at completion of an instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code 2 1 to 8 Channel Specify the programmable controller CPU of the access destination in the target station with 03FF selected 00001 S1 3 Target station s CPU type 3 es Designate the network No of the target station 1 to 239 Network No
132. UN status RUN e When the CPU module is in STOP status STOP When the CPU module is in PAUSE status PAUSE stop Ethernet module dedicated command Function Designation format Caution Sets a CPU module to STOP status remote STOP When displaying the file attribute quote stop The following is displayed as the execution result after a successful completion Displayed message 200 Command successful Before writing a program file of a CPU module set the CPU module to STOP status with this command 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L run Ethernet module dedicated command Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Designation example 3 Caution Sets the CPU module to the RUN status remote RUN Device memory clear can be designated when setting to the RUN status quote run mode clear mode Mode Designate whether to force a remote RUN 0 Normal RUN default value 1 Forced RUN Clear mode Designate whether to clear initialize the CPU module device memory when starting the remote RUN operation 0 Do not clear the device default value 1 Clear everything except for the latch range 2 Clear everything including the latch range The following message is displayed as the execution result when completed successfully Displayed message 200 Command successful To perform a normal remote RUN with Do
133. Up to 256 characters Send Mail end Mai DEC HEX IP Address Set the IP address of send mail server 00000001 to FFFFFFFEH POP Server Name Set the receive mail server name Up to 256 characters Receive Mail Input format Select the input format of the receive mail server s IP DEC Setting address HEX IP Address Set the IP address of the receive mail server 00000001 to FFFFFFFEn Input format Select the input format of the send mail server s IP address 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L a General settings Designate the mail setting values that have been registered with the Internet service provider of the local station s Ethernet module or the mail registration information designated by the system administrator 1 Password Designate the mail password of the local station s Ethernet module 2 Mail address Designate the mail address of the local station s Ethernet module 3 Check receive mails Select whether or not to check if receive mails have arrived and set the checking time interval when incoming mails are checked When receive mail check is designated set the time interval for inquiring the mail server whether or not there are mails addressed to the user The following table shows each setting range of the inquiry time intervals for checking receive mails 30 s to 24 h Setting range default 5 min 1 to 1440 30 to 3600 If the inquiry time interval from the programmable controller CPU or
134. Y PRECAUTIONS The Manual s Use and Structure About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 1 1 1 2 2 6 Chapter 3 Section 4 1 to 4 4 4 5 2 4 6 Section 5 5 1 5 2 5 5 5 6 2 5 6 4 Section 6 1 to 6 7 6 9 to 6 14 Aug 2010 SH NA 080010 M Addition of CC Link IE Field Network to the whole manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations Section 3 2 1 Section 4 4 Section 5 5 Chapter 6 Addition CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT Feb 2013 SH NA 080010 N Overall revision with the addition of the LJ71E71 100 Additional model LJ71E71 100 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent Japanese Manual Version SH 080005 S licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q or L series programmable controllers This manual describes the functions and programming of the Ethernet interface module for Ethernet communications Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q or L series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When apply
135. a target file without converting the file binary lt ret gt 3 Ifa password is registered in the Q LCPU file for file transfer set the password in the Ethernet module QCPU quote keyword set password lt ret gt LCPU quote passwd rd password lt ret gt or quote passwd wr password lt ret gt 4 Performs the file transfer operation using the FTP commands described in Section 5 6 Writing to a parameter file used in the current operation of the Q LCPU and to a file of the running sequence program that is stored in the Q LCPU program memory is performed after placing the Q LCPU in the STOP status 5 Remote password lock Changes the status of the remote password from unlock to lock if the FTP communication port has been designated as a port subject to the remote password check using the remote password setting quote password lock lt ret gt 6 Disconnecting a connection with the FTP server The connection with the FTP server is disconnected and various FTP operations ends bye lt ret gt 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L File transfer operation procedure example The following two procedures performed between log in and log out are explained as FTP operation examples e Read the sequence program file from the Q LCPU e Write the sequence program file to the Q LCPU If the FTP communication port has been designated as a port subject to the remote password check perform the remote
136. aa iA 6 56 613 I PPZN RD ces tan ia dead dd dea ti de ad e e e edo Be 6 64 014 ERA S PAN NATA o A A A A A ds Ai 6 68 APPENDIX App 1to App 8 Appendix 1 Calculating the Setting Values of the Data Link Instructions Control Data App 1 Appendix 1 1 Calculation formulas i a a A e a a App 1 Appendix 1 2 Setting examples cccccceesceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaceeeeaeeceaeeecaeeecaceeeeaeeseaeeseaeeesaeeeseaeseaeetsaees App 4 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 RELATED MANUALS The manuals related to this product are listed below Please place an order as needed MaS aame Manual number Model code Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic Specifications of the Ethernet interface module data communication procedures with external devices SH 080009 line connections open close fixed buffer communication random access buffer communication and 13JL88 troubleshooting Sold separately MELSEC L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic Specifications of the Ethernet interface module data communication procedures with external devices SH 081105ENG line connections open close fixed buffer communication random access buffer communication and 13273 troubleshooting MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function SH 080180 How to use the Web function of the Ethernet interface module Sold separately 13JR40 MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference
137. ads received data Applicable device Link direct device Intelligent q i Constant File register JOO function module Index register Zn Others O 6 5 JP GP RECV for the Main Program Set data S Di O D2 K H device UGO Instruction Executing symbol condition Command __ JP RECV S D1 D2 JP RECV Command k Joro S D1 D2 GP RECV Set data Set data Description Set by 1 Data type Network No of the local station 1 to 239 254 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal Head device of the local station that stores the control data Device name Head device of the local station that stores the reception NES Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of System NE D2 the instruction Bit D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data Jn Un Character string S The RECV instruction can be executed only when the local station is a Q L QnACPU The number of steps for the RECV instruction is 8 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data b8 to 0 D T to 1 Abnormal complete type
138. al i uiry nquiry time inte Mail server Mai Mail Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection used for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Caution MELSEC Q L 1 Construct an interlock circuit to prevent the MSEND instruction from being executed while the MRECV instruction is being executed This is because the MRECV and MSEND instructions use the random access buffer memory area as a work area Program example The following example shows a program that receives e mails This program performs e mail reception processing using the receive command X21 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F x21 ooo Ka M60 U0 G9858 F yp c wove move ZP NRECV yo DO H200 KO KO M60 DO D2 D9 D10 J J J J J r 4 1 r 4 Designate to make inquiry to the server Designate to read the head mail Designate to adjust to the data length of the receive mail Designate to adjust to the header data length of the receive mail Read receiv
139. ameters The parameters shown in Section 3 3 must be set using a programming tool 2 Accessing other stations Access to other stations is performed from an external device local station Q LCPU using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function Access to other stations with the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function is performed using the UDP IP protocol and data is always communicated in binary code In the data communication the port number for the UDP IP port for the Ethernet module system is used It is possible to continue accessing other stations while the initial normal completion signal X19 is on When the initial normal completion signal X19 is turned off the Ethernet module forcefully closes the connection although other station is being accessed 3 End processing of the Ethernet module When ending access to other station with the CC Link IE Controller Network CCink IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function that has been made using a connection opened by user execute the close processing of the connection by seeing the User s Manual Basic When the following two functions are used to access other station the close processing is not required e Communication using the data link instructions e Communication with other stations using a programming t
140. an l request flag 1 Receiving side i programmable i Receive completion device controller CPU Device specified with D2 i i l I l 1 i Receive completion device D2 1 device 1 asa l scan I i a I i l 1 Completion status 2 Error code S 1 device 1 The RECV instruction execution request flag for Channel 3 used at the receiving side Q QnACPU is as listed below For an Ethernet module Bit 2 of the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 in the buffer memory For an N W module SBA2 of the link special relay 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Program example Station 3 uses channel 3 with an SEND instruction and sends data to station 15 using channel 5 When data is received at station 15 data is read from channel 5 Programmable Programmable controller CPU E71 station 3 E71 station 15 controller CPU Channel 3 I 1 es a e eos a Channel 4 AA NA etwork No 7 a Station 3 program SEND instruction When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F x20 MOV H81 DO J With arrival confirmation oriol clock data setting required setting command Mov K3 D2 Local station usage channel MOV K5 D3
141. ant Designates the number of data word count to When writing to programmable User Binary 16 bits be written controller CPUs other than Q L QnA AnUCPU 1 to 32 Constant Write completion device local station Designate device that is turned on for one scan by the write completion System Bit D2 off Incomplete on Complete D2 1 off Normal on Abnormal setting range 1 The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as the device used for the setting data 2 In addition to the setting data the ZNWR instruction is executed using the following fixed values Channel used by own station Channel 2 Arrival monitoring time monitoring time until instruction completion 10 seconds Number of resends for arrival monitoring timeout 5 times 3 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The ZNWR instruction can be executed when the target station is a Q L QnA AnUCPU Access to an AnUCPU is available via MELSECNET 10 2 When writing data from the other station CPU module device with the ZNWR instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be write in other station CPU module D1 number of write points 1 lt last d
142. are multiple CPU modules and each connected module can be controlled by a different CPU module Control system CPU CPU module ERRCLR ERRRD A programmable controller CPU that controls operations in a redundant system A generic term for the QCPU and LCPU The abbreviation for ZP ERRCLR The abbreviation for ZP ERRRD A machine specific address that is also referred to as the MAC Media Access Control address This is used to identify the addresses of external devices over a Ethernet Address network The Ethernet address of the Ethernet module can be verified on the MAC ADD column of the rating plate The abbreviation for the QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 and LJ71E71 100 Ethernet module Ethernet interface modules Indicated as the Ethernet module or E71 in the figures The abbreviation for 1OBASE2 10BASE5 10BASE T and 100BASE TX network systems Ethernet network system GX Developer GX Works2 LCPU LCPU station L series Ethernet module MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H MRECV MSEND The product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable controllers Another term for the MELSEC L series CPU module The abbreviation for the programmable controller where the LCPU is connected The abbreviation for the LJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface module The abbreviation for the MELSECNET 10 network system The abbreviation for the MELSECNET H network system The abbreviation for ZP MRECV The abbreviation for ZP MSEND Netw
143. ation Parallel remote submaster station ICC Link IE Controller Network ICC Link IE Controller Network Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Ethernet Ethernet module Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Intelligent device station Submaster station Ethernet Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station ICC Link IE Controller Network ICC Link IE Controller Network Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station
144. b Network No IP Address 192 0 1 12 192 0 1 11 192 0 2 22 192 0 2 21 E71 module setting details when accessing from CPU 2 to CPU 1 2 Communication request destination station a Station No Setting not necessary IP Address 192 0 1 11 3 Communication request source station a Station No Setting not necessary Setting not necessary y Setting not necessary IP Address 192 0 2 22 E71 module setting details when accessing from CPU 4 to CPU 1 1 Communication request 2 Communication relay 3 Communication relay 4 Communication request source station b sending station b receiving station b destination station a Network No IP Address 192 0 1 12 192 0 1 11 192 0 2 22 192 0 2 21 E71 module setting details when accessing from CPU 4 to CPU 3 4 Communication request destination station a Station No Setting not necessary Setting not necessary Setting not necessary The a and b in the E71 station setting details column indicate whether the value is for the communication request message transmission or response message transmission a For communication request message transmission b For response message transmission 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 4 Use together system a Overview of the Use together system 1 This method uses both the IP address computation system and the table exchange system 2 Select this method to access other stations
145. ble controller CPU Ethernet module A UA J In case of binary D9 D1 DO DO 1234H D1 56781 BIN ASCII conversion In case of CSV D9 D1 DO 2 When receiving by the Ethernet module Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module Only binary data can be received D20 D21 D29 External module D21 BA98H D29 4321H i 1 For details on the order of data items when sending receiving bit device data see the figure shown in Section 2 9 2 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Data configuration in CSV format Data in CSV format can be used as control data for the cell units in Excel etc Data in CSV format handled by the Ethernet module is the data expressed as follows e 1 word 16 bits binary data is converted to four digit ASCII code when expressed as a hexadecimal 4 bytes of ASCII code e When handling multiple word data insert comma data between each word 4 bytes of ASCII code Data designated by the MSEND instruction or data subject to the news function is sent in the following arrangement a Arrangement of data sent by the MSEND instruction 1 In addition to the data conversion and insertion described above CR code ODH and LF code OAn are inserted for each 8 words of data 2 The arrangement of data sent in CSV format is shown below DO i D1 D2 iS D7 CR LF D8 D9 D10 PAE D15 CR LF D16 D17 D18 A D23
146. cal station or can be the request source However the same transfer destination Network No cannot be set two or more times multiple times 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L Routing parameter setting Target Relay Relay aa Network Network Station Setting is necessary only for No No No the request target network gt No 3 3 1 4 y CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network 3Mp1 3Ns2 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 o PS Network No 3 node Network No 1 4N1 Remote Remate Remote 2Ns4 3Ns5 3Ns4 3N3 node node CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network o MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 a Y Network No 2 Routing parameter setting Routing parameter setting 2Ns2 2N3 Target Relay Relay Target Relay Relay Network Network Station Network Network Station No No No No No No 3 2 4 1 2 1 _ Routing parameter Setting is necessary only for the request target network No 3 Setting is not necessary for the target network No 1 and 2 because they are the same station setting area Setting is necessary only for the response target network No 1 Setting is not necessary for the target network No 2 and 3 because they are the same station The meanings of the symbols used for the s
147. ce specified with D1 l T i r a aces a A E a a A a a E a a a me NaN i a 8 a j x1 The RECV instruction execution request flag for Channel 3 used at the receiving side programmable controller CPU is as listed below For an Ethernet module Bit 2 of the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 in the buffer memory For an N W module SBA2 of the link special relay 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b When abnormal completion 1 SEND instruction SEND Sequence scan o ENDHj0 END 0 END 0 ENDO END hi Send command SN Send completion device Device specified with D T T Sending side programmable controller CPU l l i Send completion device D 1 device gt 1 scan 4 Completion status S1 1 device z Error code Sl MA o Mi aaa aaa ee ee ar 1 i Ethernet i Channel 1 i module i E o S ee CM 3 RAR e a E S EEE in Data Data Data sending sending sending Send error Resend TPR designated for twice 2 RECV instruction A PUN A A E ge gee e O A EATE E E A E ESA A EE E S Ethemet i Channel 3 i module a fp a le IA Ns RC a os a al a e e aE a E eh ead e Jl SN O DO Cia EA ee nee ee N len Arrival time over END Jo END Jo END 1 l 1 RECV instruction execution I 1 Sequence sc
148. ck data set only if an p b15 to b8 b7 to b0 to S1 15 error occurs S1 12 Month 011 to 121 Year 004 to 99 Last 2 digits S1 13 Hour 00 to 23H Date 011 to 311 S1 11 Clock set flag S1 14 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00 to 59x S1 15 Year 00x to 99x First 2 digits Day of the week 00x to 06x 00 Sun to 06x Sat Stores the network number of the station that detected an abnormality This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network number Stores the station number of the station that detected an abnormality This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 120 Station number Abnormal detection network number 5 S1 16 Abnormal detection station S1 17 number 5 1 The data written storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area equal to or greater than the write data length S1 9 maximum of 960 words 2 In order to increase the reliability of the function it is recommended to execute the instruction by setting the execution type to With arrival confirmation when a number from one to 120 is designated for the target station number When 81H to AOH or FFH is designat
149. ction Sends an e mail when the programmable controller CPU is placed in the Normal STOP STOP status normally Serious Fatal Error Sends an e mail when an error that stops the CPU execution has occurred Sends an e mail when the programmable controller CPU is stopped by an Warning STOP external operation etc while an error that allows to continue the CPU execution has occurred Sends an e mail when the programmable controller CPU is placed in the Normal RUN RUN status normally Sends an e mail when an error that does not allow to continue the CPU execution has occurred while the programmable controller CPU is in the Warning RUN RUN status The programmable controller CPU is in operation PAUSE Sends an e mail when the programmable controller CPU is placed in the PAUSE status 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Send method Select the send method of the device monitoring results Explanation Send Attached File Sends data as an attached file in the file format designated in 3 Sends data as the main text of e mail in ASCII code format It is not necessary to designate items 3 and 4 when this setting is used 3 Attached file format Sends the attached file in binary format The Ethernet module sends the attached file as they are with the code currently in use Binary to ASCII conversion is not performed The Ethernet module converts the attached file from binary to ASCII a The Ethe
150. d at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled in
151. d file Stored 28an Systemaea Header information maximum of p rd Indicates the content of the header designation items above 373 words Attached file maximum of 6144 words 40004 Systemarea gt O 268BH to 3FFFH Indicates the contents of the attached file data 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 1 In the mail information storage area the following information related to the receive mail is stored in the corresponding bits Mail information storage area b15 b14 to b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO address 2682H 9858 3 1 Indicates whether the information maximum of 128 words in the From head address storage area is valid 1 or invalid 0 2 Indicates whether the information maximum of 4 words in the Date head address storage area is valid 1 or invalid 0 3 Indicates whether the information maximum of 64 words in the Subject head address storage area is valid 1 or invalid 0 4 Indicates whether or not there is an attached file Yes 1 or No 0 For Yes it indicates that the information maximum of 12 words stored at addresses starting from the Attached file name head address is valid 5 Indicates whether or not there is information in the Message ID head address storage area Yes 1 or No 0 6 Indicates the system information 7 Indicates whether the receive mail that has not been read to the programmable controller CPU is stored in the Ethernet module Yes 1 or No 0
152. d to two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction RECVS instruction for interrupt program cannot be used with the instruction for data link in cases where the same channel is used to read receive data using the instruction for data link Whether the RECV instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the RECV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the RECV instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the RECV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the RECV instruction is being executed Sequence program END END END END processing processing processing processing ON execution is completed No OFF RECV instruction RECV instruction A ederaccane execution request OFF
153. d using J SWRITE G SWRITE the next read processing is executed in succession after one read processing is completed while the read command is on When the instruction is executed using JP SWRITE GP SWRITE the read processing is executed only once when the read command switches from off to on at rise Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Program example MELSEC Q L The following example shows a program that writes the data stored in D300 to 303 to D50 to 53 of station number 3 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y40 to X Y5F X20 ft mov H81 DO With arrival confirmation clock Control data setting required setting command MOV K6 D2 Channel used by local station Mov HO D3 Target station s CPU type target CPU MOV K20 D4 Target station network number MOV K3 D5 Target station number MOV K20 D8 Arrival monitoring time 20 s mov K4 D9 Write data length 4 words x21 fj mov K10 D300 Write data setting com
154. data communication with the programmable controller CPUs of other stations as follows using the data link instructions Programmable controller CPUs of other stations on the same Ethernet network system Programmable controller CPUs on other Ethernet networks accessed via routers using the router relay function Programmable controller CPUs on other Ethernet networks or other networks accessed via a network module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function This chapter describes how to use data link instructions for data communications between a Q LCPU in the local station and a programmable controller CPU in another station using an Ethernet module via Ethernet or a network module When accessing other stations using data link instructions via Ethernet module set the parameters shown in Chapter 3 4 1 Access to Other Stations with the Data Link Instruction The data link instruction is an instruction for a Q LCPU to send receive data read write data from to the word device memory and access other stations such as remote RUN STOP with a Q LCPU in other stations connected to other networks or Ethernet If the initial processing of the local station relay station and access station s Ethernet module is finished correctly it will be possible to access other stations by the data link instruction
155. dby system CPU 6 03FFH 03D2H System A CPU 03D3H System B CPU O3FFH Control CPU 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Set data Setting range Set by Designate the network number of the target station Target station network 110239 eels number Amber 254 When 254 is designated in Jn The network 1 to 239 254 User designated by the valid module during other station access Designate the target station 1 Station number specification When a local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 120 When a local station is not a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU 1 to 64 2 Specific group 81H to AOn All the station with the indicated group 1 to 120 Target station number number Can be set when the execution 81H to AOH type designated in S1 is 0 No arrival FFH confirmation 3 All stations FFH All stations having the target network number simultaneous broadcast Excluding the local station Can be set when the execution type designated in S1 is 0 No arrival confirmation SD6 Fixed value sa ST Valid when the execution type designated in S1 is 1 With arrival confirmation 1 At instruction execution Set the number of resends when the instruction fails to complete within the monitoring time designated by User Number of resend S1 8 8 0 to 15 system 0 to 15 Time 2 At instruction completion Store the number of resends executed result 0 to 15 Time When setting 1s t
156. de SS oa AN AI ON g Ethernet module l se Se e a e aa e e a e a a e a eee S E e Ea a e e ii ls a te J RA O RE A E O AS De O A Ge eee te eae De pte tad Be pt ONT E AR AS UN g Sequence scan o ENDE o END o END Jo ENDL40 END Write command Write completion device Local station Device specified with D2 programmable controller CPU Write completion device D2 1 device Write data storage device 3000 i i Device specified with S X X i i l Buffer memory Address 209 Error code Ethernet module Target station error 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION 3 Program example MELSEC Q L Read data from D10 to 14 of station 4 to D200 to 204 of station 1 Write the data stored in D300 to 303 of station 2 to D50 to 53 of station 3 Station 1 Station 2 Programmable E71 Programmable E71 eno controller CPU AWR controller CPU instruction instruction communication communication request D200 request D300 source SSeS Station D201 C Cha R q station D301 Bi Channel j l annel i D202 onnes D302 Lt D203 PES D303 D204 Network No 1 a Program of station 1 ZNRD instruction Programmable Prog
157. ded for each setting device When Condition for inspection is set to No conditional settings character string send Notification data storage device records the data of specified notification points starting from the low byte L of the specified value If NULL 00H exists in the range contiguous data immediately before it are recorded Insert CR Code ODH and LF Code OAH for each setting device range Example Setting No conditional settings character strings send to Condition for inspection DO to Notification data storage device and 20 points to Notif data points This means that Normal system start completion is stored in DO to D19 by the MOV instruction For the main text of e mail character string binary format DO D19 CR LF Normal system start completion CR LF ASCII or SHIFT JIS format values must be set in the Notification data storage device 1 When e mail is sent after the result of the device monitoring and the monitoring condition match the Subject and attached file or the Subject and main text will be sent As a device monitoring result the data that was read from the programmable controller CPU by the Ethernet module in order to determine whether or not the conditions match will be sent For details on the correspondence between the word device values and the data format of the attached file see the figure in Section 2 7 3 The
158. destination station READ instruction 1 channel used a Calculating arrival monitoring time Apply the following values for sequence scan time of the CPU module on the communication request source station St and response time of the CPU module on the communication request destination station Rt St 20ms Rt 30ms x 1 scan 30ms Since the READ instruction is used communication processing time between the Ethernet modules on the communication request source station and on the communication request destination station Dt will be the following value Dt 9 9ms Set a value larger than the following to the arrival monitoring time St x 2 Dt Rt 20 x 2 9 9 30 79 9ms b Number of resends Set 3 times App 4 App 4 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L c Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent The processing time can be shortened by setting the arrival monitoring time shorter e Setting 100ms for the setting unit of arrival monitoring time Setting target Setting value Processing time Sequence scan time of the CPU module St Communication Arrival monitoring time unit In increments of 100ms request source Control data for the data link bit 8 of S1 0 1 station instruction Arrival monitoring time a Number of resends 3 Communication request destination Response time of the CPU module Rt station
159. device Bit number 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b RECV instruction for receive by the main program Network number designation Receive command PE Exection JP RECV Jn S D1 D2 M during startup Network module Ethernet module start I O signal designation Receive command GP Execution po GP RECV Un S D1 D2 H during startup NN Setting details Setting range Network number Network designated in the valid module for other Local station network number Start I O signal of the local station network module Ethernet Un module Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is station access expressed by three digits Control data storage head device Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the control data Receive data storage head device D1 Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device 4 the receive data Receive completion device Designate the device to turn on one scan when the Bit device 1 D2 receives complets Word device bit designation 7 OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Error 2 Word device ee T C D W ST R ZR 3 Word device bit designation Word device Bit number 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA L
160. e scan when the write is complete Word device bit designation 4 OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Abnormal 1 Bit device 2 Bit device digit designation do Word device The normal or abnormal write completion status is stored in the data link instruction execution result ZNWR instruction storage area address 209 When the write completion device D2 1 is on due to abnormal end read the error code stored in the area described above and perform the necessary corrective action See the User s Manual Basic 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Instruction execution timing a When normal completion 1 ZNRD instruction Sequence scan 0 END _ 0 END 0 END H40 END 0 END l i l 1 Read command es 1 I 1 Local station programmable controller CPU Read completion Device specified with D2 Read completion device D2 1 device OFF Read data storage device Device specified with D1 ARRE A II en A peo etee Sop ese ese eee ees Ethernet module Te Es as E A ea eS be Beet es ee a es ge ee E ESS et ee cs ee eS ee ee Ee ee ee os Fa sas EB E aa es A ae EA a pg a o EE Ethernet module Re ee eNO ae ee ne AAA AAA A O STEEL eee peoSeeeeoersee A O eee see eee eee ts pee ee eee eee eae Sequence scan o Target station pr
161. e i EENE E EEE EEE E oE EEE al SA MAMA E S q 0 END 40 END Sequence scan o END Lo END 0 END i Write command fF FF l Write completion device Device specified with D2 programmable controller CPU Write completion device D2 1 device Write data storage device Device specified with S2 Completion status S1 1 device I I ii i i I i i Local station i i i f i I i l i l Error code J ji I Ethernet Channel 1 module Target station error 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION READ instruction communication request source station 3 Program example MELSEC Q L Read data from D10 to 14 of station 4 to D200 to 204 of station 1 Write the data stored in D300 to 303 of station 2 to D50 to 53 of station 3 Station 1 Programmable controller CPU D200 D201 D202 D203 D204 E71 ae Channel 1 I 3 EEEE WRITE instruction communication request source station Network No 20 Station 2 Programmable controller CPU D300 D301 D302 D303 E71 ee e a Channel i 6 l is a al READ instruction communication request destination station Programmable controller CPU D10 D11 D
162. e error code stored in the area mentioned above and perform the necessary corrective action See the User s Manual Basic 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b ZNWR instruction Network number designation Write command J Execution H J ZNWR Jn n1 D1 8 n2 D2 during ON Write command J Execution LPR E ca Ginny st Setting details Setting range Target station network number 1 to 239 Designate the target station network number 1 to 64 constant Stations of station number 81H to 89H All stations of group number Target station number E i FFH All stations on the Designate the target station number target network number Bit device digit designation 2 Word device 3 Write data storage head device target station Designate the head device of the target station that stores the data to write Write data storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station which will Word device store the data to write When writing from Q L QnACPU 1 to 230 constant When writing from a programmable Write data length controller CPU other than Designate the number of data words to write Q L QnACPU 1 to 32 constant Bit device digit designation Word device 3 Write completion device local station Designate the device of the local station to turn on one jae Bit devic
163. e Network module CC Link IE Field Function version B Function version A network module Network module D 960 words 489 words 480 words agitoseowords OP OO O Performs the processing normally x Terminates abnormally and returns an error code to the request source 1 to 480 words 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The send data storage device S2 requires a continuous free area equal to or greater than the send data length S1 9 maximum of 960 words 2 In order to increase the reliability of the data it is recommended to execute the instruction by setting the execution type to With arrival confirmation when a number from one to 120 is designated for the target station number When 81h to AOH or FF is designated for the target station number the instruction should be executed by setting the execution type to No arrival confirmation When sending data to the same channel of the receive station do so after the receive station reads data using the RECV instruction If the communication itself is normally completed when the execution type is set to No arrival confirmation the send is considered normally completed on the send station even if the contents of the send data are abnormal In addition even if the contents of the send data are normal when the instruction is executed to the same station from multiple stations a timeout error C083H will occur on the send station When the execution type is
164. e data link instruction c When making access mutually between the own station and another station change the channel of the own station for each dedicated link instruction Station No 1 Station No 2 Own station Other station Channel 1 sending SEND Channel 1 Channel 1 RECV Channel 1 receiving Channel 3 receiving RECV Channel 3 Channel 3 SEND Channel 3 sending A maximum of eight instructions can be executed at one time as long as the channel numbers 1 to 8 designated in the control data of each instruction do not overlap d Channels used for RECV instructions cannot be used for any other instructions Channels used for other instructions must be changed 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Setting the arrival monitoring time of the control data storage device When the setting unit of arrival monitoring time is 1s set a value greater than or equal to the TCP resend timer value set in the initial processing parameter for the arrival monitoring time designation area of the control data storage device When the monitoring time is equal to or less than the TCP resend timer value the TCP resend timer value is set as the arrival monitoring time 1 When the setting value is less than or equal to the TCP resend timer value the arrival monitoring timer equals the TCP resend timer value 1 Although the uni
165. e for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries S i Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation ee The SD logo and SDHC logo are trademarks SD All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 080010 N MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Application MODEL QJ71E71 U OU E MODEL 13JL89 SH NA 080010 N 1302 MEE sfa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 ai NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPA When exported from Japan
166. e locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction 4 Whether the REQ instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the complete device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the REQ instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the REQ instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the REQ instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the REQ instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program ZII A ves REQ instruction ON execution is completed ac i l OFF o REQ instruction AS i ON Send receive OFF instruction flag i i Poe oouo i ON i Completion device OFF E ARO i l Abnormal i i ON completion i i Noma Status display device at OFF Me ee completion y completion One scan 5 When the instruction is executed using J REQ G REQ the next write processing
167. e mail This indicates the main text of e mail sent by the Ethernet module 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 9 Sending E mails Using the Programmable Controller CPU Monitoring Function When the monitoring information read from the Q LCPU matches with the news conditions set by the user the Ethernet module sends an e mail to the external device 2 9 1 News setting Purpose of setting The monitoring conditions notification conditions of the programmable controller CPU can be set on the news setting screen of a programming tool The monitoring function of the programmable controller CPU can be used according to this setting Both CPU status monitoring and device monitoring can be designated as notification conditions Start procedure E mail setting screen gt News Setting Setting screen Ethernet News Setting Condition For Serious Fatal Error y 5 mi PLC Inspection Serious Fatal Error v PLC Inquiry Interval inute v Send Method Send Attached File Send Text Mail Attached File Name Attached File Form csv Input Format of Inspection Value Monitoring News Data no Condition Device Condition for Inspection A Device Eq wo DevicevaueMatch l Jee y Epo bevicevalue lt Monitoring Yalue Unsigned a Pulse Up Pulse Up Pulse Up Cancel 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION Item name MELSEC Q L News settings Notification condition Descri
168. e mails 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 3 ZP MSEND This instruction sends e mails Applicable device Set Link direct device Intelligent Internal device f y Constant data File register JOO function module Index register Zn so o sa o o K H device UNGO i Instruction Executing symbol condition Command ZP MSEND ZP MSEND Un S1 S2 D 1 1 If the originating station is a Basic model QCPU function version B or later a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU double quotation of the first argument can be omitted Set data Set data Description Set by 2 Data me Un Un Start I O signal of the local station s Ethernet module 00 to FEn The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal S1 Head device of the local station that stores the control data la Head device of the local station that stores the contents of the e mail JS Device name User StingrBinary 100 16 bits S2 A MS be sent Subject attached file or Subject main text Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of D the instruction System Bit D 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data The MSEND instruction can be executed only when the local station is a Q LCPU The number of steps for the MSEN
169. e name of a CPU module rename FILE PATH BEFORE CHANGE FILE PATH AFTER CHANGE abbreviated as ren To change the file name of the file stored in the RAM of memory card rename 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG 1 SEQ1OLD QPG Upon normal completion either of the following response codes is shown 350 Need more info 250 Rename successful See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 Enter the user name and password for the connected FTP server User User name Password User name FTP login name set during Ethernet module FTP parameter setting Password Password set during Ethernet module FTP parameter setting See Sections 5 3 for the FTP login name and password To designate the user name user QJ71E71 To designate both user name and password user QJ71E71 QJ71E71 e The password entry from the keyboard is not displayed 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 2 Ethernet module dedicated commands The Ethernet module dedicated commands to be attached to the FTP operation command quote are explained status Ethernet module dedicated command Function Designation format Displays the operating information of a CPU module This command is to check the operating information of a CPU module when a file is transferred to the CPU module When displaying the file attribute quote status Either of the following is displayed as the execution result after a successful completion e When the CPU module is in R
170. e operation is completed successfully when the remote password unlock processing is performed 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L keyword set Q series Ethernet module dedicated command Function Sets the registered password of the target file for file transfer in the Ethernet module Or display clear the current password set in the Ethernet module Use this command only if a password is registered in the target file of file transfer The Ethernet module performs a password check when the designated file is accessed Designation format quote keyword set password Password To set a password designate the password registered in the file of the target memory of a CPU module Designate x x to clear a password set in the Ethernet module One of the following is displayed as the execution result for a successful completion When setting a password 200 Command successful When displaying a password 200 keyword is password When clearing a password 200 Command successful Designation example 1 To set the password 1234 to the Ethernet module quote keyword set 1234 Designation example 2 To display the password currently set in the Ethernet module quote keyword set Designation example 3 To clear the password currently set in the Ethernet module quote keyword set gt gt If a password is registered in the target file for file transfer set the password in the Ethernet
171. e transfer FTP Details are explained in Chapter 5 The Ethernet module supports the server function of the TCP IP standard protocol FTP File Transfer Protocol By using the FTP commands files in a CPU module can be read or written in file units This allows files in a CPU module to be managed with devices such as computers This also allows files to be transferred or a file list to be browsed as needed FTP client Ethernet FTP server 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q L 1 2 Additional Functions in Function Version B or Later The following table lists the functions added to Q series Ethernet modules of function version B or later 1 The added changed functions shown in this section includes the functions added in the first products or later of function version B and function version D For the function version serial No and software version of the Ethernet module and related products CPU module and programming tool with the added changed functions see the User s Manual Basic 2 For functional comparisons depending on the Ethernet module function version refer to the User s Manual Basic 1 Functions added for function version B Reference Function Overview section Sending files in CSV Sends a file in CSV format as attachment to e mail from the format as attachment Ethernet module Sending main text Sends main text of up to 960 words from the Ethe
172. eceive instruction flag corresponds to the channel used completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SWRITE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the SWRITE instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SWRITE instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the SWRITE instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program See gt ON Send receive OFF tt fac A direction flag EN execution is completed a E A ao OFF Completion device O completion f f i f f f i Abnormal i f 1 F Normal 1 i 1 Status display device OFF at completion Operation of the other station when the SWRITE instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program o AN Ss Write completion of device data designated with the ON OFF SWRITE instruction Completion device m 5 When the instruction is execute
173. ed execution is a function for forcefully executing remote RUN from other station when the station that executed the remote STOP is no longer able to execute remote RUN Designate the status of the CPU s device memory only when executing remote RUN S2 3 Clear mode 0000 Do not clear however the local device will be cleared 00011 Clear excluding setting and latch range at remote RUN 00021 Clear including setting and latch range at remote RUN 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Response data All values are set by the system When all stations or a group FFH or 81H to AOH is specified in Target station No S1 5 no response data will be stored Remote RUN_ Remote STOP D1 Request type 00901 When station No is specified in S1 5 Al G 00014 Remote RUN D1 1 Sub request type 00021 Remote STOP 1 Remote RUN STOP becomes valid when the RUN STOP key switch of the target station s Q L QnACPU is RUN 2 Remote RUN STOP cannot be executed when the system protection is activated on the target station s Q L QnACPU 3 When other station has executed a remote STOP PAUSE operation on the target station the RUN request cannot be executed if the mode of S2 2 is Do not force execution 0001H 4 Resetting the Q L QnACPU of the target station where a remote STOP operation has been executed erases the information of the remote STOP 5 The clear mode S2 3 designates how the clear initializa
174. ed for the target station number the instruction should be executed by setting the execution type to No arrival confirmation 3 When writing to a device of the same station from multiple stations make sure that the timings of the write operations do not coincide If the communication itself is normally completed when the execution type is set to No arrival confirmation the send is considered normally completed on the write source station even if the contents of the send data are abnormal In addition even if the contents of the send data are normal when the instruction is executed to the same station from multiple stations a timeout error C083H will occur on the write source station 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS 2 x3 x4 5 6 7 8 MELSEC Q L The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic It can be specified when the local station has an Ethernet module of function version D or later Not available for any other case Access to the control CPU is required Nothing is stored if the execution source detects an error when receiving an instruction When the WRITE instruction is executed to the redundant system with a control system or standby system CPU specified the instruction
175. egarding abnormal end of the request processing Response regarding a syntax error Response regarding information request such as status Response regarding control or data connection Response regarding log in processing or account processing Unused Response regarding the FTP server status 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER 5 6 4 FTP operation command MELSEC Q L The FTP operation command functions and usage on the FTP client external device side supported by the Ethernet module FTP server are explained CAUTION e Some of the FTP operation commands on the FTP client external device side supported by the Ethernet module may not perform as explained in this manual depending on the FTP application used on the client side See the manual for the FTP client external device as well and confirm the functions and operation methods 1 FTP server support commands binary Function Designation format bye Function Designation format Same function close Function Designation format delete Function Designation format Designation example Caution Similar function dir Function Designation format Designation example Similar function Notifies to the FTP server that the file transfer is performed without converting the file The carriage return code and kanji code are not converted either The Ethernet module
176. en connecting a cable with connector to the module connect the connector part to the module securely e Make sure to place the communication and power cables to be connected to the module in a duct or fasten them using a clamp If the cables are not placed in a duct or fastened with a clamp their positions may be unstable or moved and they may be pulled inadvertently This may damage the module and the cables or cause the module to malfunction because of faulty cable connections e Tighten the terminal screws using the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it may cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off If the terminal screws are tightened excessively it may damage the screws and cause the module to short circuit malfunction or fall off e When disconnecting the cable from the module do not pull the cable by the cable part For the cable with connector hold the connector part of the cable For the cable connected to the terminal block loosen the terminal screw Pulling the cable connected to the module may result in malfunction or damage to the module or cable e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction e A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipati
177. end files to the Ethernet module as attachments to e mail specify the encoding method Base 64 7 bits 8 bits Quoted Printable of the attached files Common precautions a c The Ethernet module stores the data of attached files received from the external device in the device specified by the MRECV instruction without converting it from ASCII to binary The maximum sizes of data that can be sent received by the Ethernet module are as follows Data size of attached files Up to 6k words e Data size of main text Up to 960 words Mails that are sent and received do not support encrypted data compressed data and data conversion d When the external device could not be found in an e mail sending from the Ethernet module the error code can be checked through the reception processing with the MRECV instruction If an external device cannot be found when sending e mail using the MSEND instruction failure of e mail transmission may not be recognized depending on the operation of the mail server Be sure to verify the receiver s e mail address in advance x Error codes are stored within the control data of the MRECV instruction For details on error codes refer to the User s Manual Basic e The e mail function is supported for the SMTP and POP3 servers 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION k MELSEC Q L When communication errors of e mails cannot be checked by a dedicated instruction check the error codes sto
178. er Character sting S2 Head device of the peac douse o me rost saon tom atien data re _ station from which data is read E tee Device name D1 Head device of the local station that stores data read device of the local station that stores data read Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of D2 the instruction System D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally Bit D3 Device of the target station that is turned on for one scan by completion of the instruction Read notification device 4 The Set by column indicates the following User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The SREAD instruction can be executed only when the target station is Q L QnACPU The SREAD instruction cannot be executed for an ACPU connected to the MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet network systems Therefore the target station numbers should be the station numbers of Q L QnACPU only When reading data from the other station CPU module device with the SREAD instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be read in other station CPU module S2 number
179. er 8 bits first 2 digits of year 00x to 99h lower 8 bits day of the week 00 Sunday to 06x Saturday 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Send data Set data Setting range Set by S2 0 to Send data S2 n Designate the contents of e mail Subject attached file or Subject main text to be sent 2 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 3 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic Functions 1 This instruction sends mails to the designated external device a When sending data as an attached file CPU module Ethernet module Mail server MSEND Un S1 D Transmission destination Send destination mail number mail address address gt Subject Main Text Attached file Attached file name mmddhhss bin b When sending data as main text CPU module Ethernet module Mail server Transmission destination number mail address Send destination mail ddress gt Subject Main text 2 Whether the MSEND instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D or completion status display flag D 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D Turns
180. er Mail server Ethernet Programmable controller CPU module 3 module controller CPU MSEND i Checks whether or not any mails were received Stores information No mail receive mail received Mails received Mail send 1 Mail send gt 4 Confirms information of 1 receive mail MRECV g Reads receive lt Request to receive mail 1 gt Stores receive mail 1 Send an e mail to the send mail server of the local station s Ethernet module 2 The send mail server of the local station s Ethernet module sends the e mail to the receive mail server of the send destination device When receiving by the Ethernet module 3 The Ethernet module checks whether any mail has arrived at the inquiry interval set with a programming tool and stores the results to the buffer memory 4 By executing the MRECV instruction the Ethernet module reads e mails from the e mail server to the mail buffer The programmable controller CPU reads one e mail and stores it in the mail buffer of the programmable controller CPU s device By user designation with the MRECV instruction the Ethernet module reads the number of remaining receive mails on the mail server and stores this number in the buffer memory When receiving by a PC 5 Mails are received using a mail user agent The e mail send reception function by the programmable
181. er destination is the connected current directory of the FTP startup connection See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 Displays the file names of the files stored in a CPU module Is drive name To display the file names of the files stored in the RAM area of memory card Is 1A dir Deletes the file stored in a CPU module When deleting the multiple files the file name and extension are designated using wild cards or mdelete FILE PATH abbreviated as mdel To delete all files with the extension QPG in the files stored in the RAM area of memory card mdelete 1 QPG e See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 delete 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER mdir Function Designation format Designation example Caution Similar function mget Function Designation format Designation example Caution MELSEC Q L Stores the detailed information file name creation date and size of the files stored in a CPU module to the FTP client side file as log data mdir transfer source drive transfer destination file path To store the detailed information of the files stored in the RAM area of memory card to S990901 LOG file mdir 1 S990901 LOG Always designate directly after the drive name of the transfer source When designating the transfer destination file path FTP client side always designate the transfer source drive name When the transfer destination file path is not d
182. er memory area when a response to a simultaneous broadcast from the Ethernet module is returned from an external device Error code end code area address from E5H 229 These processing are performed automatically with the Ethernet module Interlock when executing the data link instruction a Via Ethernet Execute the data link command when the local station communication request source station Ethernet module is at the following I O signal state X19 X1F er A SEND X19 Initial normal complation signal X1F Watchdog time error station signal b Via other networks Check the status of the local station communication request source station communication relay station and access destination communication request destination station using the following devices Execute the data link instruction if the status is normal e Link special relay SB20 SB47 SB70 etc e Link special register SW70 to 73 SW74 to 77 etc See the reference manual for each network for the interlock signals link data send receive processing and processing time when performing data communication with the programmable controller CPU of another station via other networks Specifying the number of times to resend the data link instructions When executing each data link instruction except for ZNRD and ZNWR it is recommended to designate a value greater than 1 for the number of resend designation area of the control data storage device
183. er power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTs are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date_ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080010 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080010 B Jun 2001 SH NA 080010 C Oct
184. ervices srl ROMANIA Losinjska 4 a Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 HR 10000 Zagreb RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA AutoCont CS So CZECH REPUBLIC INEA RBT d o o SERBIA Private Bag 2016 Technologicka 374 6 zletnicka 10 Eh 160 Lando CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec SER 113000 Smederevo Phone 27 0 11 977 0770 Phone 420 595 691 150 Phone 381 0 26 615 401 BO Fax 420 595 691 199 Fax 381 0 26 615 401 Beijer Electronics A S DENMARK SIMAP s r o SLOVAKIA Lykkeg rdsvej 17 jana Derku 1671 DK 4000 Roskilde SK 911 01 Trencin Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Phone 421 0 32 743 04 72 Fax 45 0 46 75 56 26 Fax 421 0 32 743 75 20 Beijer Electronics Eesti OU ESTONIA PROCONT spol s r o Pre ov SLOVAKIA P rnu mnt 160i K peln 1 A EE 11317 Tallinn SK 080 01 Presov Phone 372 0 6 51 81 40 Phone 421 0 517580 611 Fax 372 0 6 5181 49 Fax 421 0 51 7580 650 Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND INEA RBT d o o SLOVENIA Peltoie 37 Stegne 11 FIN 28400 Ulvila SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 358 0 207 463 540 Phone 386 0 1 513 8116 Fax 358 0 207 463 541 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 UTECO GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 GR 18542 Piraeus SE 20124 Malm Phone 30 211 1206 900 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 30 211 1206 999 Fax 46 0 40 93 2
185. escription of setting Setting range option Station No lt gt IP Select the Station No lt gt IP information system conversion method Information System This setting is required when IP Address Computation System or Use Together System Net Mask Pattern is selected as the conversion method Set the mask value used in the logical product with the local station s IP address Input Format Select the input format of Net Mask Pattern and IP Address This setting is required when Table Computation System or Use Together System is Network No selected as the conversion method Set the Network Nos of the communication request destination source stations This setting is required when Table Computation System or Use Together System is Station No selected as the conversion method Set the station number of the communication request destination source stations This setting is required when Table Computation System or Use Together System is IP Address selected as the conversion method Set the IP address of the communication request destination source stations Automatic Response System IP Address Computation System Table Exchange System Use Together System C0000000 to FFFFFFFFu 1 to 239 set in decimal 1 to 64 set in decimal A value other than 00000000 and FFFFFFFFu 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 1 Station No lt gt IP information system co
186. esignated the file name set by the FTP application on the FTP client side is used to save the file The transfer destination is the connected current directory of the FTP startup connection mls Reads a file from a CPU module When reading multiple files the file name and extension for the file path is designated using wild cards or Receive confirmation is performed for each file transfer mget FILE PATH To read all files with extension QPG from the files stored in the RAM area of memory card mget 1 QPG The files read are stored on the FTP client side with the same file name The destination is the connected current directory of the FTP startup connection See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER mis Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Caution Similar function 0 mput Function Designation format Designation example Caution MELSEC Q L Stores the file names of the files stored in a CPU module into a FTP client side file as log data mls transfer source drive name transfer destination file path name To store the file names of the files stored in the RAM area of memory card to the file S990901F LOG mis 11 S990901F LOG To store the file names of the files in the memory where the parameter file used for the current operation of QCPU is stored to the file S990901F LOG mis 1 S990901F
187. essage command frame from the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function the send source Network No IP address and UDP port number in the request message are stored internally The response message response for the communication request message is returned to the destination IP address and UDP port number calculated from the stored Network No and station number Therefore by receiving the other station access communication request message first the communication partner stations can be maintained 2 The maximum number of station information that can be set is 64 When more than 64 other station access communication request message is received the Ethernet module starts deleting from the oldest data to store the station information in the newly received message communication request message However it is ignored if the station information is the same as the station information already stored Information from the same station is not stored twice 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 2 IP address computation system a Overview of the IP address computation system During calculation the IP address of the partner station is obtained from the calculation equation below according to the Network No and station number and the UDP port number predefined for the Ethernet module system is used as the UDP port number of the destination For m
188. essing refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used The following shows the processing flow of the items shown in the formula Ethernet module Ethernet module Programmable communication request communication request Programmable controller CPU source station destination station controller CPU Command UDP Dt Receive response UDP Read request Rt Response UDP Read data Lf otf Receive response UDP 1 na IA DEE PPP Processing ended 1 The receiving side Ethernet module notifies the sending side Ethernet module of successful data reception 2 Setting arrival monitoring time Set arrival monitoring time to the control data for the data link instruction Although the setting unit can be selected from 1s and 100ms setting 100ms is recommended When 1s is selected the arrival monitoring time cannot be set shorter than the TCP resend timer To shorten arrival monitoring time the TCP resend timer value must be reset When 100ms is selected arrival monitoring time can be set without considering the TCP resend timer value x1 The 100ms option is available for the QJ71E71 100 and LJ71E71 100 with a serial number first five digits of 12062 or later App 2 App 2 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L 3 Number of resends Set the number of resends in case that timeout occurs due to packet loss caused by poor line c
189. et line load line traffic number of connections used at the same time exchange processing which uses another connection and the system configuration 2 Precautions when starting up the Ethernet module When the QCPU is write protected DIP switch 1 is on file transfers which perform write attribute change file write etc cannot be performed Excluding the Universal model QCPU 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 3 Precautions common to any usage of the file transfer functions a For an external device When a time out error occurs during file transfer using the FTP function the FTP function line is closed disconnection regardless of the settings of the programming tool When restarting the file transfer login to the Ethernet module from the FTP client again b For the Q LCPU 1 If a password is registered in the target file for file transfer transfer that password set in the Ethernet module using the FTP operation command after login If a password is registered that file cannot be accessed unless a password of the same character string is designated The password is a character string for file access that the user registers in the Q LCPU and it allows prohibits access to the target file The Q LCPU files of target file transfer must be only the files in the root directory for each memory When the Q LCPU file being accessed do not perform any Q LCPU key switch operat
190. etwork MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function is described 3 2 1 Accessible range and stations External External Ethernet device device module 3 Ethernet i z E 7 a CEN 11 Accessing on the same Ethernet T TE te A A AES A A a a Ethernet Ethernet 2 Accessing to External External CPU Ethernet module module remote Ethernet device device module Ethernet i POES gt l External lopy Ethernet Network 3 Accessing CC Link IE device i module module Controller Network l CC Link IE Field i Network a aa er ala a ea Vegi SRE aan a MELSECNET H CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network 4 Accessing Ethernet via Ethernet and MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE MELSECNET 10 7 Field Network MELSECNET H and via Ethernet MELSECNET 10 Network Network E CPU module module CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 EORNA A CPU Network Ethernet 1 module module Ethernet i 5 Accessing remote Ethernet Router with the router relay External Ethernet External Ethernet device module device module Ethernet 1 Accessible range a Routing via the Ethernet and CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network systems is allowed within the range
191. evice number of host station CPU module gt x Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as D1 3 The normal or abnormal write completion status is stored in the data link instruction execution result ZNWR instruction storage area address 209 If the write completion device D2 1 is on due to abnormal end read the error code stored in the area mentioned above and correct the error accordingly Functions 1 This instruction write n2 points of data from the word device designated by S of the local station to the word device of the connected station having the network number designated by Jn n1 in the Ethernet network system When writing the device data to the target station is completed the completion device designated in D2 turns on Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module S D1 Channel 2 Fixed Ethernet 2 The ZNWR instruction is executed using channel 2 fixed The data link instructions and the Ethernet instructions cannot be executed from two or more stations at the same time on the same channel If the conditions of more than one instruction to be executed match at the same time the instruction executed later is made to wait until the channel becomes available since handshaking is performed automatically 3 Whether the ZNWR instruction
192. f a station where an Ethernet module is connected 2 Setting screen of a programming tool This manual explains the parameter settings with a programming tool in the following format The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation 2 6 E mail Setting Using a Programming Tool This section describes the settings required to send and receive e mails using a programming tool 1 DNS setting Purpose of setting Specify the IP address of the DNS server when setting the mail server name using the domain name by the e mail setting see 2 Start procedure Network parameter setting screen gt Initial Setting Setting screen 1 Shows how to start the setting screen J S Network Parameter Ethernet Initial Setting Module No 1 ME M Timer Setting Module will operate with default values if setting is left blank 2 Shows the setting screen of GX Developer M DNS Setting Input Format pec lt pl a DNS setting y Designate the Internet service provider used by the local station s Ethernet moduls and the IP addresses o the domain name servers DNS 3 Shows a description of the designated by a system administrator r setting 1 Select the input format of the IP addresses decimal hexadecimal 2 Designate the IP addresses of the DNS servers to DNS servers 1 to 4 Depending on
193. following for the attribute To change to read only file ir To change to read write enabled w Designation example 1 To display the file attribute for the file stored in the RAM area of memory card quote change 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG Designation example 2 To change the file attribute of the file stored in the RAM area of memory card quote change 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG r Caution When the programmable controller CPU is set to RUN an error occurs when the following files are designated Parameter file File currently being executed by the program memory drive name 0 The attribute changing is possible between read only file and read write enabled file e See sections 5 5 and 5 6 1 The file attributes designated using the quote change command are explained 1 When changing the attribute of the file for file transfer designate the attribute after the change 2 The attributes are for changing the file to read only or read write enabled file The attribute can be changed to the following for the files stored in the CPU module memory using this command r read only gt w read write enabled An user created file has the read write attribute if it has not been changed 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L cpuchg Q series Ethernet module s dedicated command Function This command designates an access target CPU with a multiple CPU system configuration Alternatively it displays the cur
194. g data The RECVS instruction can be executed only when the local station is a Q LCPU The number of steps for the RECV instruction is 10 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Set data Setting range Setby S 0 Complete type Designate 0 ae Uer ee Stores the status at completion of the instruction Completion status 0 Normal System Other than 0 Abnormal error code 3 Designate the ch ber that st data to b d S 2 Local station storage channel SOU ne Cae ere ere Let eee Ae PD 1to8 User 1 to 8 Channel number Stores the channel number used by the send station Channel used by send station 4 to 8 Channel number System Stores the station number of the send station 1 to 120 Station number receive from the station with the indicated station number i 6 System area en 8 pone ns word count of the receive data stored in D1 0 to Receive data length Pe Ge receive data Se 1 to 960 Word count of receive data S 10____ systemarea lo d o Receive data Set data Setting range Setby D1 0 to Receive data Store the receive data System D1 n The receive data storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area equal to or greater than the receive data length S 9 maximum of 960 words 2 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU s
195. g values of the number of resends and arrival monitoring time and their setting examples refer to Appendix 1 The allowable read data length S1 9 of the READ instruction varies depending on the version See the User s Manual Basic Specifying a length value outside the setting range will cause a 4101 error OPERATION ERROR on the local station 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions on 62 MELSEC Q L 1 This instruction designates the target network number and target station number of a station connected to other networks or Ethernet in the control data and reads the data of designated word devices of that station When reading the device data is completed the completion device designated by D2 turns on Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module READ Channel n Channel 8 Ethernet 2 Device data can be read from stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the specified network number in addition to stations connected to the local station s network 3 The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking
196. gnated The file name must be designated according to the file name rules of the programming tool Alphabets uppercase numbers and symbols can be used Alphabets lowercase cannot be used File name Max 8 characters Extension Max 3 characters For the extension identifier the name fixed by the Q LCPU must be used The corresponding file extension is designated as seen in section 5 6 2 For details on the file names and extensions see the operating manual for the programming tool used When using a FTP operation command which can designate multiple files the files file names and extensions are designated using wild card symbols x 2 Files containing the characters before and any set of characters including none replacing the gt are designated Example 1 When designating all files with the QPG extension QPG Example 2 When designating file names which start with MAIN and the extension is QPG MAIN gt QPG The files containing the text string designated including none replacing with any character including none can be used multiple times Example 1 The letter after MAIN is any character and the extension is QPG MAIN SEQ QPG Example 2 To designate all files whose extension start with QP QP Example 3 To designate all files whose extension start with Q Q97 In the description of the FTP operation commanas the file name indicates both the file name and extension
197. gram and its processing is completed within one scan Sequence program o Ea q prog processing RECVS instruction 3 RECVS instruction interrupt program use can not be used with the instruction for data link in cases where the same channel is used to read received data using the instruction for data link 1 When a dedicated instruction completes abnormally the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S 1 See the following manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFuH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Program example The following example shows an interrupt program that reads the receive data from channel 5 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F El FEND 150 SM400 A HO D20 vov Ko D22 Local station storage channel X19 Z REGYS UO D20 D300 MIO X19 Initial normal completion signal IRET 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 7 J P G P REQ Remote RUN STOP This instruction issues remote RUN STOP requests to programmable controller CPUs of other stations Applicable device Link direct device i Internal device i MENE i Intelligent Constant File register function module
198. h 01234567 bin 12 bytes eee d e A c v a To Designate the mail address of the Ethernet module b Subject Designate the subject of the e mail to be sent to the Ethernet module in ASCII format c Main text Do not designate data the Ethernet module ignores it d Attach file Data can be sent as an attached file Send the attached file data as binary data The Ethernet module does not convert the received attached file data from ASCII to binary e Attached file name Designate the name of the attached file using alphanumeric characters It is recommended to use the name within eight characters Designate either bin or asc for the attached file extension The stored data will be received as binary data Designate a single attached file when sending e mail to the Ethernet module If two or more files are attached the destination Ethernet module will store only the first file and ignore the rest of the attached files 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 7 3 Contents of the attached files The following explains the contents of the attached file data The data format of the attached file is ASCII code ASCII format CSV format or binary code binary format The following example shows the transmission contents for each data format binary ASCII CSV when the Ethernet module sends the data register value as an attached file 1 When sending from the Ethernet module Programma
199. h program cannot be used as devices used in setting data Character Character The SEND instruction can be executed only when the target station is a Q L QnACPU The SEND instruction cannot be executed for an ACPU connected to an MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet network system 1 Setting values stored in Completion status S1 1 and Clock data S1 10 to S1 14 are stored into control data upon completion of the instruction 2 The number of steps for the SEND instruction is 8 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Set data Setting range Setby 7 b7 to bO 0 2 1 1 Execution type bit 0 0 No arrival confirmation When the target station is on the same network Completed when the data is sent from the local station gt Complete Execution source Target station When the target station is on other network Completed when the data arrives at the relay station on the network of the local station oO Complete Execution source Relay station Target station Execution abnormal complete type O 1 With arrival confirmation Completed when the data is stored in the target station s designated channel y Complete i Target station Execution source Relay station Target station i Complete 4 O 2 Abnormal complete type bit 7 Set whether or
200. he bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not S1 11 Clock set flag j age System cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid Continued to the next page 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Set data Set by 0 The clock data upon abnormal end is stored in BCD This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally 1 12 completed S1 Clock data set only if an P to b15 to b8 b7 to bO System error occurs E S1 15 S1 12 Month 011 to 12x Year 00 to 99 Last 2 digits S1 13 Hour 00x to 23x Date 011 to 311 S1 14 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00 to 59x S1 15 Year 00x to 99x First 2 digits Day of the week 00x to 06x 00 Sun to 06x Sat Stores the network number of the station that detected an abnormality f This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal S1 16 Abnormal detection lote t oe The tered valde t S1 network number 3 complete type S1 0 is t Be ore ye Us is no cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network number System Stores the station number of the station that detected an abnormality This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when
201. he following example shows a program that sends e mails 1 When sending e mail as an attached file This program performs e mail transmission processing using the send command X20 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 wove H800 D20 Designate ASCII as the send data format MOVP KI D22 Designate the send destination number MovP Kio D29 Designate the send data length Move K7 D30 Designate the subject length MOVP testmail msend D200 Designate subject MOVP H1234 D207 Designate the attached file MOVP H5678 D208 MOVP HOABC D209 ZP MSEND uo D20 D200 M10 Send the e mail Mio M11 A A T a SS 7 Processing program when normal completion wi PT Processing program when abnormal completion 2 When sending e mail as main text This program performs e mail transmission processing using the send command X20 When the I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 KY ov H1000 D20 Y Designate main text as the send data format wove KI D22 J Designates the send destination number WovP K16 D29 J Designate the send data length _ o K D30 Designate the subject length MOVP testmail msend D200 J Designate Subject JS 80VP Error Machine 001 0207 J Designate the main text ZP MSEND uo D20 D200 Mo y Send the e mail Mo MP da E 7 i Processing program when normal completion
202. he parameter described in Section 3 3 the other station access becomes possible with the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function Function that can be Communication range Communication Function reference When using this function When not using this function request source section used for communication Communication using F Only possible to read write External device Reference manual the MC protocol Possible to read write data data from to the CPU in a station here a network the data link programmable controller other stations in Ethernet is die x Chapter 4 module is Communication using from to another station s programmable controllers of instructions which is the access request where a station with an icant i connected destination from an access Ethernet module is connected Operating manual for the programming tool Communication with source device via multiple Example Only the access 1 other stations using a networks and Ethernet shown in the figure in Section Programming tool programming tool 3 2 1 is accessible used 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 2 Range of Accessible Other Station s Programmable Controllers and Accessible Stations The accessible range and the stations when performing the other station access via Ethernet module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field N
203. he response message response for the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and the data in the conversion table above c Designation example Shown on the next page 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L Setting example 1 Communication request source station Network No 51 CPU E71 Station No 211 i IP Address 3 192 0 1 11 3 Communication relay 2 Communication relay sending station receiving station Network No 1 i Network No 2 i Station No 212 i Station No 21 i IP Address 5 192 0 1 12 ne i IP Address 192 0 2 21 1 Ethernet Network No 2 E Netw a Network No 32 CPU E71 Station No 22 i IP Address 192 0 2 22 H 4 Communication request destination station E71 module setting details when accessing from CPU 1 to CPU 2 1 Communication request source station a Setting value Decimal Setting value Decimal Setting value Decimal Setting value Decimal Setting value Decimal Setting value Decimal Station No Setting not necessary Setting not necessary Setting not necessary IP Address 192 0 1 12 E71 module setting details when accessing from CPU 1 to CPU 4 1 Communication request 2 Communication relay 3 Communication relay 4 Communication request source station a receiving station b sending station a destination station
204. he second other station access after the first other station access is complete If the second SEND instruction is executed before the first SEND instruction is completed the SEND instruction ends in error 2 Instruction other than the SEND instruction 1 When simultaneous other station access is performed to the same communication request destination station from multiple communication request source station and a busy error being accessed from other station occurs re execute the instruction 2 When accessing other station from the same communication request source station to the same communication request destination station execute the second data link command after other station access by the first data link instruction is complete 3 Broadcast Simultaneous broadcast When FFh is designated as the target station number in the control data when executing SEND WRITE SWRITE REQ on the Ethernet the command is sent to all external devices on the network 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L Example IP address when the command is sent for class B Bit location 31 3029 to 1615 to 0 H Class Network address Host address Read dump the received commands not related to the local station on the external device The COM ERR LED indicator of an Ethernet module may turn on and an error code may be stored in the following buff
205. ignate the login name login name default value QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 lt ret gt Designate the password password default value QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 lt ret gt When logging in use the FTP login name and password set on the Ethernet FTP parameter settings screen for setting the login name and password Upon reception of the login name and password from the external device FTP client the Ethernet module FTP server checks whether they match with the FTP login name and password set in the FTP parameter setting area of the buffer memory File transfer to the Ethernet module is allowed when the login name and password match and not allowed if they do not match Remote password unlock Changes the status of the remote password from lock to unlock if the FTP communication port has been designated as a port subject to the password check using the remote password setting quote password unlock remote password lt ret gt If the FTP communication port has been designated as a port subject to the password check other commands cannot be used until the remote password status is unlocked 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 4 Various operation of the FTP 1 Designate an access target CPU if the ACP U is configured as a multiple CPU system The control CPU of the Ethernet module will be the access target CPU after login quote cpuchg access target CPU lt ret gt 2 Notifies file transfer to
206. in the setting range allowed for the user For details on SD SW refer to the manual for the programmable controller CPU or network module of the target station Instruction Executing symbol condition Command JP SWRITE Jn D2 D3 JP SWRITE 22 3 Command esw Un 51 D2 03 GP SWRITE 93 The following format can be used only when the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU Instruction Executing symbol condition Command JP SWRITE Jn s1 S2 01 02 03 JP SWRITE 2 3 Command or swarre Un D2 D3 GP SWRITE 2 3 2 The SWRITE instruction can be programmed without argument D3 However in such a case the operation is identical to the WRITE instruction With the SWRITE instruction different operations are available depending on whether D3 is omitted or not x3 When the target station is a Basic model QCPU or safety CPU the write notification device set as argument D3 for the target station is ignored Same operation as with the WRITE instruction 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Setting data Jn Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station access User Binary 16 bits Un Start 1 O signal of the local station s Ethernet net module 00 to FE The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit I O signal
207. ing shows a sample program for sending e mails by the programmable controller CPU Perform e mail send processing using the send command X20 The contents of the send data are shown in 4 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X20 f vove vove nove MOVP testmail msend H800 KI K10 K7 H1234 H5678 H9ABC D20 D22 D29 D30 D200 D207 D208 D209 Designate ASCII as the send data format Designate the send destination number Designate the send data length Designate the subject length Designate subject Designate the attached file Send the e mail When an error occurs while sending e mail from the sending mail server to an external device an error code is stored in the receiving error log area 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L x1 The following shows the transmission format of the attached file designated in the control data of the MSEND instruction x b12 For how to select the binary format ASCII format and CSV format see Section 6 3 to b8 Complete type Designate the transmission format of the attached file Setting values for designating the attached file transmission format Format set Applicable station Description of processing b12 bit oto bo Ethernet module ea 7 Sends the attached file in binary format Binary Personal i x gt bin computer U
208. ing the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Please make sure that the end users read this manual e Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X Y1F are assigned for an Ethernet interface module For I O number assignment refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS wiiecxcted a Sl eee iaoa et iad hada abled Mice ed lead Machi the baer A 1 CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT oocccccccnccncnnnnnnnnononononononononononcnononononononononononononononononnnonononononon A 9 REVISION Se hha A ease a ah Ns a Sas ae ce A a eas oe A 10 CO NITE ING Seog a eevee ies A cet vac a ia A 12 RELATED MANUALS incite cette AA iad iba iad o a A 15 The Manuals Wse and Structtire sce lato doli lit a A 16 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviati0NS cccccccccnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnininononononononononnnnnnnnnnnonnn ono n cnn nn nn nn A 20 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 5 A COVE VIE Wiscdiidtiailaiandla indi botnet echelon 1 1 1 2 Additional Functions in Function Version B or Later ceecescessesssessssseessssssssseeseeeseeaaes 1 4 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION 2 1 to 2 41 ZA EMMA FICA A AA oeadea a a bases 2 1 2 1 1 E mail send and reception by the programmable controller CPU unoncccccicincccocccccnccnnocnnarnnanann
209. intoafle O O o o x mout WriteafletoaCPUmodue_ OY _O_ x Oo _ x lopen__ ConnectwitnFTPsever doj o o o o put WriteafletoaCPUmodue OT O x Oo _ x o fff fouit Disconnect and end the connection with FTP server O O only use Ethernet Send FTP server sub command module dedicated commands 2 1 The parameter file and the sequence program file cannot be deleted when a CPU module is in RUN x2 The list of Ethernet module dedicated commands used along with the quote command is described When executing the commands from the FTP client attach the command after the quote command Example When executing the stop command Enter the following in the command prompt quote stop lt ret gt 3 This setting is automatically set to an Ethernet module Files are transferred in binary regardless of the setting in the Communication Data Code field on the Ethernet Operation Setting screen of a programming tool 5 2 5 2 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L Programmable controller CPU status Remote password Command Function i Whil Remarks i tedi e While locked A unlocked x Q Change the file name of a CPU module 1 o o Enter user name and password for Ethernet module 21 9 o E the operating information of a CPU module stop Seta CPU module to STOP status a CPU module to STOP status 2 change Display change the file attribute
210. ion P J ZNRD Jn n1 S D1 n2 D2 5 during ON Read command JP Execution H JP ZNRD Jn n1 S D1 n2 D2 during startup Setting details Setting range Target station network number 1 to 239 Designate the target station network number 1 to 64 constant Bit device digit designation 2 Word device Target station number Designate the target station number Read data storage head device target station Designate the head device of the target station that stores the data to read Read data storage head device local station Designate the head device of the local station which will VWord device sl store the data to be read When reading from Q L QnACPU 1 to 230 constant When reading from a programmable Read data length controller CPU other than Designate the number of data words to read Q L QnACPU 1 to 32 constant Bit device digit designation 2 Word device 3 Read completion device local station Designate the device of the local station to turn on one Bit device scan when the read is complete Word device bit designation d OFF Incomplete ON Complete OFF Normal ON Abnormal 2 Bit device digit designation os Word Evie The normal or abnormal read completion status is stored in the data link instruction execution result ZNRD instruction storage area address 207 When the read completion device D2 1 is on due to abnormal end read th
211. ion can be registered as the notification conditions 1 Device monitoring of the programmable controller CPU e Monitoring the numeric values stored in the word device e Monitoring the bit device ON OFF status 2 Monitoring of the programmable controller CPU status e Monitoring the CPU module status RUN STOP PAUSE b The device monitoring result of the programmable controller CPU is sent by either the main text or attached file of e mail 1 The attached file is sent by converting the device monitoring data into binary ASCII CSV data format 2 The main text is sent by converting the device monitoring data into Binary or ASCII format data c As for the status monitoring result of the programmable controller CPU only the Subject that stores the programmable controller CPU status is sent d When more than one send mail address are specified in the new specification setting the smallest numbered address is set in the To field of the mail header The other addresses are set into the Cc field for transmission 2 Data conversion method used by the Ethernet module The following shows the data conversion method used by the Ethernet module Ethernet Mail module ae er server ubjec ncode gt ASCII data gt binary data Base64 7bit o binary data g Main text X Encode 5 ibinarydatay PSP Rp 3 3 binary data Attached file ASCII data Encode binary data gt F Base64 CSV data 2 USING T
212. ion data length S 9 designated in the control data of the MRECV instruction only the data equivalent to the designated reception data length will be stored and the remaining data will be ignored 3 Whether or not there are mails on the mail server can be determined by the on receive mail off no receive mail of bit 15 of the mail information area address 2682H 9858 in the buffer memory The information in the mail information area is updated when the MRECV instruction execution completes 4 Whether the MRECV instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the MRECV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Tums on and off depending on the completion status of the MRECV instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the MRECV instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation when the MRECV instruction is being executed Mail information area b15 MRECV instruction completion device D2 D2 1 Ethernet module l iry time interv
213. ion module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction damage to the machines or accidents Disposal Precautions AX CAUTION e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste e CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCT e 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in Nuclear Power Plants and any oth
214. ions change operation status with the programming tool such as RUN gt STOP and STOP gt RUN turn off power reset power or install remove the memory card or SD memory card If any of these operations are performed the Q LCP U files will corrupt and the Q LCPU may not be able to start again Do nat perform any file operations read write change file information from the programming tool when the FTP function is in operation When file operations are performed from a peripheral device etc while the FTP function is in operation the FTP function may abnormally end If the FTP communication port is designated as a port subject to the remote password check perform the file transfer operation after changing the remote password status from lock to unlock Perform the lock processing for the remote password when the file transfer processing is completed x If the FTP communication port is not designated as a port subject to the remote password check the operation is completed normally when the remote password unlock processing is performed The remote password is a character string registered in the Q LCPU with a programming tool by a user and data to allow prohibit access to the Q LCPU of another station via the Q LCPU in the station with the Ethernet module connected or via the station with the Ethernet module connected 4 Precaution when logging in to the Ethernet module FTP server Only one external device FTP client can log
215. is registered in the file which is at the changed destination set the write password for the new target file in the Ethernet module again Upon login to the Ethernet module the write password set is initialized or cleared 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS The dedicated instructions are used to simplify programming for using the functions available for the intelligent function module This chapter explains the dedicated instructions for the functions that are explained in this manual among those dedicated commands available for the Ethernet module that can be used in Q LCPU 6 1 Dedicated Instruction List and Available Devices 1 Dedicated Instruction List The following table lists the dedicated instructions explained in this chapter ee Dedicated ro Reference Application Functional description instruction section MRECV Reads received e mails 1 Section 6 2 For E mail sending receiving 1 MSEND Section 6 3 For communication Data link instruction READ Reads data from word devices of other station Section 6 4 Reads from other station s device For reading writing SREAD Section 6 10 EA completion device device data WRITE Writes to other station s device 2 to other station s device Writes to other station s device 2 Section 6 12 6 12 For Q LIQnACPU Writes to other station s aii SWRITE Section 6 11 with completion device For reading
216. is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction 4 Whether the READ instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the READ instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the READ instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the READ instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Operation of the local station when the READ instruction is being executed END END processing processing Sequence program S AS pS ON execution is completed BR READ instruction OFF OLD ee i ON j A Send receive OFF instruction flag i OFF i Completion device Status display device E OFF at completion 7 MELSEC Q L END END processing processing Abnormal ON completion 4 Normal completion_ y One scan 5 When executing the instruction using JP READ GP READ the read processing is executed only once when the read instruction flag switches from off to on at rise See the following manuals regardi
217. is automatically set to this binary Abbreviated as bin Disconnects the FTP server connection and ends FTP bye quit Disconnects the FTP server connection close Deletes the file stored in a CPU module delete FILE PATH To delete a file stored in the RAM of memory card delete 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG e See section 5 5 and 5 6 1 mdelete Displays the file names creation dates and sizes of the files stored in a CPU module dir drive name To display detailed information of files stored in the RAM of memory card dir 11 Is 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER get Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Caution O is Function Designation format Designation example Similar function mdelete Function Designation format Designation example Caution Similar function MELSEC Q L Reads the file from a CPU module get TRANSFER SOURCE FILE PATH transfer destination file path Reads the file stored in the RAM area of memory card and stores using the same file name get 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG To read the file stored in the RAM area of memory card and store using a different file name get 1 SEQIBAK QPG ISEQISEQ10LD QPG When the transfer destination file path FTP client side is not designated the file is stored in the FTP client side with the same name as the transfer source file name CPU module side The transf
218. is currently being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ZNWR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the ZNWR instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the ZNWR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing Operation of the local station when the ZNWR instruction is being executed Sequence program ZNWR instruction Send receive direction flag Completion device Status display device at completion Errors Program example X22 Write command END END END END processing processing processing processing A E oS ON ZNWR instruction execution is completed E ON 1 ji I completion _y AA OFF ION OFF A Abnormal ON completion a Normal OFF One scan 1 When execution of a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns ON and the result is stored in the data link instruction execution result ZNWR instruction storage area address 209 of the buffer memory See the followi
219. k quote password lock The following is displayed as the execution result for a successful completion 200 Command Okey To designate the remote password 1234 quote password lock password unlock Ethernet module dedicated commands Function Designation format Designation example 1 Caution Designate the remote password set in a CPU module and perform the unlock processing This command is used when the FTP communication port is designated as a port subject to the remote password check quote password unlock remote password Remote password Designate the remote password set in the parameter of a CPU module The following is displayed as the execution result for a successful completion 200 Command Okey The following is displayed if the remote password does not match 556 Password Error The following is displayed if another command is requested before the remote password unlock processing is performed 555 Password Locked To designate the remote password 1234 quote password unlock 1234 e If the FTP communication port is designated as a port subject to the remote password check the status will be locked when the user logs into the Ethernet module from an external device Executing this command and performing the unlock processing prior to various operation of the FTP enables file operation in a CPU module If the FTP communication port is not designated as a port subject to the remote password check th
220. ler CPU Ethernet module N W module Ethernet module Programmable N W module controller CPU i i Channel 1 i i f HH READ Channel 2 H Channel gt wT Channela r 1 Word device Channel 5 Channel 6 2594 A Channel 7 Channel J Word device See Section 4 6 Instruction execution station Local station Station type Ethernet Ethernet module Target station Station type Ethernet Ethernet module Target station type MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Ethernet module Ethernet Ethernet module Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station QCPU QnACPU LCPU Interface board for a personal computer Local station Submaster sta
221. lly and returns an error code to the request source 1 A C086H error occurs on the local station On the target station the corresponding bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 of the buffer memory remains OFF and no error occurs 2 On the local station although the initial transmission is completed normally a C085H error will occur for the second one or later The target station behaves as follows e Upon the initial reception of the SEND instruction message the corresponding bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 of the buffer memory turns ON e Executing the RECV instruction generates a C1A6h error by which the corresponding bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 cannot be turned OFF The RECV instruction generates an interrupt however the instruction is not be executed 3 On the local station the SEND instruction is completed normally On the target station execution of the RECV instruction generates a 4001H error and turns OFF the corresponding bit in the RECV instruction execution request area address 205 Check the send data length 1 to 480 words and execute the SEND instruction lt When the target station is a network module gt Target station RECV RECVS Target station RECV Local station L series CC Link Q series Q series MELSECNET H network QnA series SEND IE Field Network CC Link IE Controller module MELSECNET 10 modul
222. main text will be sent after converting the data read into ASCII code data If the condition for inspection is set to No conditional settings character strings send for e mail text transmission however binary code data are sent without being converted When e mail is sent after the result of the CPU status monitoring and the monitoring condition match only the Subject will be sent The attached file and main text will not be sent Mail contents are not properly displayed on the receiving side when both of the following conditions are met e the format of data notified in the main text is in binary character string e the value set in the news data storage device is in a format other than ASCII format or SHIFT JIS format 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS An Ethernet module can access other stations from an external device or a Q LCPU in a station where an Ethernet module is connected via Ethernet and the following networks e CC Link IE Controller Network e CC Link IE Field Network e MELSECNET H e MELSECNET 10 This chapter describes the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function to communicate data with other stations via an Ethernet module and network modules 3 1 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Relay Communication Function By setting t
223. mand mov K20 0301 Write data Mov K30 D302 Hov K40 D303 X22 X59 E E MOV K5 D7 J Number of resend Write command E UR SRITE 20 DO pago D30 MoO M100 1 X59 Initial normal completion signal NGO fe pte ee O m Processing program on write completion N61 VO EN Aa H Processing program on normal completion i Processing program on abnormal completion Performs error code reading etc MOV D1 D100 F 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 12 JP GP WRITE This instruction writes data to word devices of other stations Applicable device Link direct device Intelligent A Index register Constant JOO function module Others Zn K H device UL GH x1 T C D W ST SD or SW can be used For SD SW data can be written within the setting range allowed for the user For details on SD SW refer to the manual for the programmable controller CPU or network module of the target station Instruction Executing symbol condition Command al Command The following format can be used only when the local station is a Universal model QCPU or an LCPU Instruction Executing symbol condition Command JP WRITE JP WRITE Jn S1 p GP WRITE GP WRITE Un S1 i Setting data Set data Set by Data type Network number of the local station 1 to 239 254 254 The network designated by the valid module during other station Binary 16 bits access User Start 1 O signal of the local
224. may be unsuccessfully completed due to system switching occurred on the target station error code 4244H 4248h If this has occurred execute the WRITE instruction again When data of more than 480 words is specified a CO84H error occurs on the local station Check the write data length 1 to 480 words and execute the WRITE instruction For how to determine the setting values of the number of resends and arrival monitoring time and their setting examples refer to Appendix 1 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions MELSEC Q L The allowable write data length S1 9 of the WRITE instruction varies depending on the version See the User s Manual Basic Specifying a length value outside the setting range will cause a 4101 error OPERATION ERROR on the local station 1 This instruction writes data for the device designated in S2 of the local station Local station Programmable controller CPU and succeeding devices to the word devices of the station designated with the target station network number and target station number in the control data The station must be connected to a network other than those designated or Ethernet When writing device data to other station number is completed the completion device designated in D2 turns on Response station Programmable Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module S2 Channel 1 D1 WRITE gt Channel n Channel 8
225. mote access from 7 to 1 Setting item Station that does To not E A ra A EC E E E E E aa information setting AAA AA A Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay y x x z x SE s parameter 6 When performing a remote access from 7 to 3 Setting item Station that does To not n UR ci ce a E CC E CI E E ne el information setting Ox Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay SE g g v S x 7 parameter 7 When performing a remote access from 7 to 4 Setting item Station that does Ta not E uE al CE ES fe ets to Routing information setting information setting a O 00 00 IP information zme i he eee parameter 8 When performing a remote access from 7 to 6 Station that does does not X require setting 7 Network parameter x e o e o o Cx Routing information seting x e e e x x Setting the Ethernet Station No lt gt x x x IP information Setting the Ethernet router relay x x x x x x parameter 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 4 Procedure for Accessing Other Stations This section explains the procedure for accessing other stations via the Ethernet using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function as well as the required processing 1 Setting the par
226. n Ethernet port QCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU Q2ASHCPU Q2ASHCPU S1 QA3ACPU Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU RECV The abbreviation for JP RECV and GP RECV RECVS The The abbreviation for Z RECVS ss A for Z RECVS A A abbreviation for the MELSEC Q L MELSEC Communication Protocol Reference Reference Manual M nual a me abbreviation or JREG JEREO GREGandGPREG O The abbreviation for JP SWRITE and GP SWRITE Standby system CPU A e or P SWRTE ond AE controller CPU that stands by in case the control system fails in a redundant system System A CPU A programmable controller CPU where the system A connector of a tracking cable is connected in a redundant system System B CPU A programmable controller CPU where the system B connector of a tracking cable is connected in a redundant system UINI The abbreviation for ZP UINI ssi abbreviation for ZP UINI TUET _ abbreviation for the MELSEC Q L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual User s Manual Application ae Application User s Manual Basic The abbreviation for the Q Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic and MELSEC L Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Basic User s Manual Web function The abbreviation for the MELSEC Q L Corresponding Ethernet Interface Module User s Manual Web function WRITE The abbreviation for JP WRITE and GP WRI
227. nation methods in the data link instruction see Chapter 6 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 3 Using the Data Link Instructions This section explains how to use the data link instructions when accessing other stations via the Ethernet module 1 SEND instruction 1 When performing simultaneous other station accesses from multiple communication request source stations to the same communication request destination station change the channel number of the communication request destination station for each communication request source station If the channel number is being used at the communication request source station being accessed from other station using the same channel number when other station is accessed the data link instruction ends in error So re execute the instruction x If the channel number used is different at the communication request destination station side simultaneous other station access can be performed from a maximum of eight communication request source stations to the same station 2 When performing other station access from the same communication request source station to the same communication request destination station change the channel number at the communication request destination station side When designating the same channel number on the communication request destination station side perform t
228. nd CPU module in case of a communication failure Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signals as an output signal from the programmable controller CPU to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions AX CAUTION e Do not bundle the control wires and the communication cables with the main circuit and the power wires and do not install them close to each other They should be installed at least 100 mm 3 94 in away from each other Failure to do so may generate noise that may cause malfunctions e When changing the operating status of the programmable controller CPU such as remote RUN STOP from the external device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time for the Initial timing setting in the network parameter The communication line will be closed when Do not wait for OPEN Communications impossible at STOP time is selected and the remote STOP is executed from the external device Consequently the programmable controller CPU cannot reopen the communication line and the external device cannot execute the remote RUN Installation Precautions A WARNING e Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Using the programmable controller
229. net module the read password set is initialized or cleared 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L passwd wr L series Ethernet module dedicated command Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Designation example 3 Caution Sets the registered write password of the target file for file transfer in the Ethernet module Or display clear the current write password set in the Ethernet module Use this command only if a write password is registered in the target file of file transfer The Ethernet module performs a password check when the designated file is accessed quote passwd wr write password One of the following is displayed as the execution result for a successful completion When setting a write password 200 Command successful When displaying a write password 200 Write password is write password When clearing a write password 200 Command successful When displaying a write password with the write password not set 200 Write password is not set To set the write password ABCD1234 efgh to the Ethernet module quote passwd wr 1234 ABCDefgh To display the write password currently set in the Ethernet module quote passwd wr To clear the write password currently set in the Ethernet module quote passwd wr c or quote passwd wr C One write password can be set in the Ethernet module If the target file for file transfer changes and a password
230. ng manuals regarding the error code check the errors and take corrective actions lt Error codes gt 4FFFuH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection for the CPU module used C000h or higher User s Manual Basic A program that writes the contents of D300 to 303 of station number 2 to D50 to 53 of station number 3 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X19 YH 32 ae ot K3 D50 D300 KA M10 X19 Initial normal completion signal SET Y30 Normal completion display RST Y31 Mi UN Mov 6209 D10 Error code ser Y31 Error completion display RST Y30 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L APPENDIX Appendix 1 Calculating the Setting Values of the Data Link Instructions Control Data This section explains how to determine values set to control data for the data link instructions arrival monitoring time and the number of resends and the processing time of the instructions The arrival monitoring time refers to monitoring time after the Ethernet module sends a request by the data link instruction until the instruction processing is ended When the processing is not ended the instruction is resent by the number of resends The processing time described in this section depends on the network load ratio line congestion and system configuration When applying the value to the system make sure that it will not cause a problem in control Appendix 1 1 Calculation formulas 1 Arrival moni
231. ng the error code check the errors and take 4FFFH or less User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and The following example shows a program that reads data from D10 to 14 of station When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y40 to X Y5F Clock data setting is required Channel used by local station Target station s CPU type Control CPU Target station network number Target station number Arrival monitoring time 20 s Read data length 5 words Number of resend X59 Initial normal completion signal Performs error code reading etc Errors 1 When a dedicated instruction ends with an error the abnormal completion signal D2 1 turns on and the error code is stored in the completion status S1 1 corrective actions lt Error codes gt Inspection for the CPU module used COO0H or higher User s Manual Basic Program example number 4 to D200 to 204 of station number 1 X20 ii mov H81 DO Control data E os 2 MOV HO D3 mov K20 D4 Mov K4 D5 mov K20 D8 MOV KS D9 X21 X59 H MOV K5 D7 Read l command uP READ J20 DO D10 D200 MO MO acacia 1 Processing program on read completion M PE EE E SE ae EI aie ae et A e EE EE E EEEa a Processing program on normal completion M foe te CN Processing program on abnormal completion mov D D100 6 18 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L This instruction re
232. not clear the device memory selected quote run To perform a forced remote RUN with Do not clear device memory selected quote run 1 To perform a forced remote RUN with Clear all device memory except for the latch range selected quote run 11 The forced execution mode is only used to allow the forced remote RUN from another device when the CPU module cannot perform the remote RUN due to problems in the device which issued the remote STOP for the CPU module When a normal RUN is designated and the system is already set to the STOP or PAUSE status by another device the system is not set to the RUN status Select the clear mode of the device memory upon operation startup depending on the system configuration After the CPU module performs the clear operation the system runs according to the PLC parameter settings PLC File Initial Device Value 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L change Ethernet module dedicated command Function Displays changes the file attribute of the file stored in the CPU module Designation format When displaying the file attribute quote change FILE PATH Either of the following is displayed as the execution result after a successful completion When the designated file is a read only file DR When the designated file is a file with read write enabled CN Designation format When changing the file attribute quote change FILEPATH ATTRIBUTE Designate either of the
233. ns 2 1 2 1 2 Sending e mail using the programmable controller CPU monitor function ooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 3 2 2 Configuration and Environment of the Applicable System cceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeas 2 5 2 3 Precautions for Using the E mail FUNCTION ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeenas 2 6 2 4 E mail Specifications siei asi e etae eee eraa aeee eet aeae e eeaeee as Aeaaeai re tae a eaea 2 8 2 5 Processing Procedure of the E mail Function ooonnninnnnnnnnnonnnonnconncanccan ocn n can crnr narnia 2 9 2 6 E mail Setting Using a Programming Tool ncnnnninininnnnnl nnnninonnconcnnncan nc crr crac ran 2 10 2 7 Sending Receiving E mail Attached Files by the Programmable Controller CPU 2 15 2 7 1 When sending data as an attached file 0 eee ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateatenas 2 15 2 7 2 When receiving data in the attached file ec eeeeceeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeecaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeenaeeaeesas 2 20 2 7 3 Contents of the attached files ooo cece ccccesecececeseeeeeeeneceneesneceecsneceneeuseesseeseecaeeneeceeeeteceeeseeeneeeneeeses 2 26 2 8 Sending E mail Main Text by the Programmable Controller CPU eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereereeaeeas 2 28 2 8 1 When sending data as main text Of O Mail ee eee eeeeee cent eee eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenteeas 2 28 2 9 Sending E mails Using the Programmable Con
234. nstruction Data transmission is performed via the main text or attached file of e mail using the MSEND instruction 1 For an attached file device data and other information is sent by converting into binary ASCII CSV data format 2 For the main text ASCII code data character string data created by a sequence program is sent b Receiving e mail by the programmable controller CPU MRECV instruction Receives attached file data of e mail using the MRECV instruction The main text data of e mail cannot be received 2 1 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Data conversion method used by the Ethernet module The following shows the data conversion method used by the Ethernet module When sending e mails When receiving e mails Programmable Mail i Mail Programmable controller CPU g server server controller CPU Subject Encode _ 7 Subject Does not decode a ASCII data Base64 7bit i ASCII data Main text Encode En i Main text Cannot be MRECV ASCII data 7bit i ASCII data received instruc tion Binary data i Attached file Encode Attached file Decode binary data gt ASCII data Base64 binary data Base64 7bit 8bit CSV data i Quoted Printable 3 Flow of the e mail The following diagram illustrates the flow of e mail sent by the programmable controller CPU to its reception by the external device Programmable i Ethernet Mail serv
235. nversion method address 4H b7 b6 a There are four kinds of Station No lt gt IP information methods as shown below b Select one of them according to Section 3 3 2 and make sure to set the values on this screen using the method selected The default conversion method is the Automatic response method Parameter settings requirement Conversion method Net mask pattern Conversion setting Automatic response system IP address computation system X Table exchange system XL O O Use together system pone E lt k O Setting required X Setting not required 2 Net mask pattern address 3A9H Designate the mask value based on the guidelines given below This pattern is used in a logical sum with the local station s IP address when calculating the IP address of the external device using the IP address computation system a When setting the sub net mask designate the target settings of the IP address class network address and sub net address so that all bits are 1 in the mask pattern The mask pattern is designated with a decimal hexadecimal value obtained by dividing the 32 bit mask value into 8 bit segments b When the sub net mask is not designated the mask pattern designation is not necessary When the mask pattern is not designated the following mask value is used as the mask pattern according to the local station IP Address class Mask value used FF 00 00 00H FF FF 00 00H F
236. o S1 O arrival monitoring time unit Set a value greater than or equal to the TCP resend timer value for the monitoring time up to instruction processing termination 0 to 16383 0 to TCP resend timer value Monitoring is performed by the time set to the TCP resend timer Aoiberar TCP resend timer value 1 to 16383 Monitoring time unit Second resends set to S1 7 8 When setting 100ms to S1 0 arrival monitoring time unit 1 to 65535 Monitoring time unit 0 1 seconds Designate the number of write data in S2 to S2 n S1 9 Write data length When writing to Q LCPU 1 to 960 Word 1 to 960 User When writing to QnACPU 1 to 480 Word 7 S1 10 Not used AAA A A Continued to the next page If processing is not ended Arrival monitoring time san dye instruction is resent by the 1 to 65535 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Set data Setting range Setby Store the valid invalid status of the clock data in S1 12 to S1 17 This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 0 Invalid 1 Valid The clock data upon abnormal end is stored in BCD This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S1 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally S1 12 completed S1 Clo
237. o the header data length of the received mail Words User 1 to 373 The number of data that will be stored in D1 to D1 n X Including the header length described below Store the data length of the mail s header that was stored in D1 0 to D1 n System 1 to 373 The number of receive data that was stored in D1 to D1 n Store the valid invalid status of the clock data in S 12 to S 15 A Invalid System 1 Valid Higher 8 bits month 01 to 121 lower 8 bits last 2 digits of year 00H to 99h lower 8 bits date 01H to 31 System Higher 8 bits second 00 to 591 lower 8 bits minute 00x to 59x Higher 8 bits first 2 digits of year 00x to 99 lower 8 bits day of the week 00 Sunday to 06x Saturday 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Receive data Set data Setting range Set by D1 1 D1 This stores the contents header attached file of the to Receive data System D1 n received e mail The receive data storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area equal to or greater than the receive data length S 9 maximum of 6517 words 2 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 3 The following shows a description of the processing after the MRECV instruction is executed by selec
238. ocessing time Control data for the data link instruction Arrival monitoring time unit bit 8 of S1 0 In increments of 1s Arrival monitoring time Number of resends Communication request destination station Response time of the CPU module Rt Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent by the number of resends 20ms x 2 10s x 3 120ms 30 16s 20ms x 2 10s x 3 30ms 30 07s 1 Values in parentheses are assumed that service processing is set to 4 times refer to 2 a in this section 2 Since the arrival monitoring time value default 0 is smaller than the TCP resend timer value default 10s the processing time will be the same as the TCP resend timer App 7 App 7 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L MEMO App 8 App 8 INDEX Ethernet module dedicated A commands FTP eoocoocicciciococoniciconincnos Accessible range CC Link IE Controller Network Ethernet module support CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H commands FTP 5 2 5 21 MELSECNET 10 0oocconccccccccccncconccconncnnccnnnannnns 3 2 Arrival monitoring time oooocccnnnnnn n App 1 F Attributes of file eeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees 5 18 File Path ceecceeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneetsnees 5 16 Automatic response System 3 9 A chiang 5 1 FTP command ccccccceesessteeeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 5 21 B FTP log in NAME
239. odule Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Ethernet Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station CC Link IE Controller Network ICC Link IE Controller Network Control station Normal station Control station Normal station ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Target station type QCPU QnACPU LCPU A CPU other than those listed above QCPU QnACPU LCPU A CPU other than those listed above 1 To access a programmable controller CPU other than a Q L QnACPU use the one in a station connected to MELSECNET 10 x2 The instructions cannot be used when the source or target station is a safety CPU 3 Data cannot be written from other stations to a safety CPU 4 Up to the channel 2 can be used in the CC Link IE Field Network 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMM
240. of a CPU module Designate an access target CPU when configuring DENT the multiple CPU system or display the present access target CPU ll E A O lock lock a O A E unlock Unlock server dedicated Set a file access password to an Ethernet module or QEAEAES commands display clear the file access password set in an Ethernet module Set a file access password for read password to an Ethernet module or display clear the file access password for read password set in an Ethernet module Set a file access password for write password to passwd wr an Ethernet module or display clear the file access S password for write password set in an Ethernet module 4 This command becomes disabled with the switch of a programmable controller CPU set to STOP 5 This command can be used only in a Q series Ethernet module 6 This command can be used only in an L series Ethernet module Some of the commands in the table may not operate as described in this manual depending on the client side FTP application See the manual for the FTP client side external device and confirm the functions and operation methods as well 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 2 File Transferable Range The file transferable range from the external device Q LCPU in a station where an Ethernet module is connected is explained The file transfer operation from the external device using the Ethernet module FT
241. ogrammable controller CPU Read data storage device Device specified with S 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 ZNWR instruction Sequence scan 0 END 70 END 0 END 70 END 0 END Wri l l if Nf e command E tr l l Local station programmable controller CPU Write completion device Device specified with D2 j 1 scan i A wo Write completion device D2 1 device OFF Write data storage device 3000 x X Device specified with S Ethernet module E ce os eet A Gee aan E ea a Sma San SS aa Se a ae Gash ele pss cs con aa cS A ee Sar en Hep aa i es wea a ec aa et Ms va ql SS a ii MMM st Ethernet module Ik Sequence scan 0 0 END 0 END Target station programmable eee fa rite Gata storage device controller CPU Device specified with D1 i i AAA SS AS eee SHS SSeS ees d 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L b When abnormal completion 1 ZNRD instruction Sequence scan Read command F a ee l Local station programmable controller CPU Read completion device Device specified with D2 Read completion device D2 1 device Buffer memory E d Address 207 rror co
242. on before system operation e Correctly solder coaxial cable connectors Incomplete soldering may result in malfunction Setup and Maintenance Precautions AX CAUTION e Never disassemble or modify the module This may cause breakdowns malfunctions injuries or fire e Before mounting dismounting the module be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Failure to do so may cause module failure or malfunctions e Do not mount remove the module onto from base unit more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant after the first use of the product Failure to do so may cause the module to malfunction due to poor contact of connector e Do not touch the terminals while the power is on Doing so may cause electric shocks or malfunctions e Before cleaning up and retightening terminal screws and module fixing screws be sure to shut off all phases of external power supply used by the system Not doing so may cause failure or malfunction of the module If the screws are loose it may cause the module to fallout short circuits or malfunction If the screws are tightened too much it may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in the module falling out short circuits or malfunction e Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the body etc before touching the module Failure to do so may cause a failure or malfunctions of the module Operating Precauti
243. ondition The following shows the resend processing flow of the Ethernet modules Ethernet module Ethernet module Programmable communication request communication request Programmable controller CPU source station destination station controller CPU READ Command UDP y Receive response UDP A No response Command UDP SO e Receive response UDP SS Noiresponse e Resent by the e number of resends Command UDP Receive response UDP SES Read request Response UDP Read data Receive response UDP Processing ended 4 Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent The following shows the formula Total processing time of the data link instruction when the instruction is resent by the number of resends St x 2 Arrival monitoring time x Number of resends Rt St Sequence scan time of the CPU module on the communication request source station Rt Response time of the CPU module on the communication request destination station App 3 App 3 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L Appendix 1 2 Setting examples This section explains the calculation example of arrival monitoring time setting value and the processing time of the data link instruction when the calculated value is set to the control data 1 Executing the READ instruction for one channel Communication request source station Communication request
244. onitor the operation of the local station s Q LCPU when the Ethernet module is operating as the FTP server A timeout may occur due to long internal processing time when file operation is performed in a CPU module with a large program capacity If a timeout occurs extend the CPU monitoring timer value Designate the setting value in the range of lt 1H to 7FFFH 1 to 32767 gt The FTP connection is disconnected if a Q LCPU monitoring error is detected after the FTP client login When restarting the file transfer make sure that the local station s Q LCPU is operating normally and start over from the login operation again 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 4 Procedure and Required Processing on the External Device Side FTP Client This section explains the procedure and required processing on the external device side for using the FTP server function of the Ethernet module In the explanation the FTP operation commands and input formats used for the applicable operations are shown lt ret gt indicates input using the CR Enter or Return key FTP transfer operation procedure Procedure on the external device side FTP client Log in to the Ethernet module 1 Check the initial processing of the Ethernet module 2 Log in to the Ethernet module Is the connection to be used subject to the remote password check Remote password unlock processing
245. ons A CAUTION e When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from a personal computer connected to an intelligent function module read relevant manuals carefully and ensure the safety before operation Incorrect change or modification may cause system malfunction damage to the machines or accidents Precautions When Disposing of This Product AX CAUTION e Dispose of this product as an industrial waste Precautions for using the MELSEC L series Ethernet interface module Design Precautions WARNING e For the operating status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for each network Incorrect output or malfunction due to a communication failure may result in an accident e To prevent the malfunction of the programmable controller system due to harmful e mails take preventive measures such as antivirus measures so that the mail server for this module does not receive harmful e mails e To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the Internet take appropriate measures e When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always
246. ons are explained 1 Precautions when designing a system which uses file transfer functions a c For the system When performing file transfers with the system in operation or controlling the status of the programmable controller design the system such as configuring an interlocking circuit in the sequence program so that the safety of the overall system is always maintained For external devices Some of the FTP operation commands on the FTP client external devices supported by the Ethernet module as a FTP server may not operate as described in this manual depending on the client side FTP application See the manual on the FTP client external devices and confirm the functions and operation methods For the Q LCPU 1 Only files that can be created generated by the user with a programming tool can be transferred See Section 5 6 2 2 Files can be transferred only to the local station Q LCPU with the Ethernet module connected Designate an access target CPU if the local station s QCPU is configured in a multiple CPU system 3 When file read write is performed by the file transfer functions while Q LCPU is running the Q LCPU s sequence scan time may take longer than when using Ethernet module s other functions and the file read write take a few minutes or longer depending on the file size or sequence scan The file read write processing time may take even longer depending on various conditions such as the Ethern
247. ool 3 5 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations The following describes precautions when accessing other stations via the Ethernet module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function 1 Set a network number different from that of the Ethernet network system to be set for the Ethernet module In addition make sure that the same station numbers for the Ethernet network system as those already assigned to the existing network system mentioned above and other Ethernet are not used 2 Access to other stations using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function is performed using the UDP IP protocol and data is always communicated in binary code 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L See the manual for each network module for the interlock signals and the send receive processing and processing time of the link data when performing data communication with Q LCPUs of other stations via other networks 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION With the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function the Q LCPU can perform
248. operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device and CPU module in case of a communication failure e Do not write any data to the system area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited signal as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system Design Precautions AX CAUTION e Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Keep a distance of 100mm or more between them Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise e When changing the operating status of the CPU module such as remote RUN STOP from the external device select Always wait for OPEN Communication possible at STOP time for the Initial timing setting in the network parameter The communication line will be closed when Do not wait for OPEN Comm
249. or multiple relays through a network in which the Ethernet and CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network systems coexist as well as through a network in which multiple Ethernet network systems are connected Using this function a programmable controller in another station is accessible via other networks and Ethernet Ethernet Access source CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Ethernet Access source 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q L 3 Perform data communication between programmable controller CPUs Details are explained in Chapter 4 This function sends and receives data to from another station s programmable controller CPU via the Ethernet using the data link instructions SEND RECV READ WRITE REQ ZNRD ZNWR 1 It also sends and receives data to from a programmable controller CPU in another station via Ethernet and other networks x1 The ZNRD and ZNWR instructions are not available for the CC Link IE Field Network QCPU E71 QCPU E71 LEE AL Ethernet network system QCPU E71 QCPU E71 READ 5 WRITE E Ethernet network system QCPU PA E71 QCPU E71 Remote Ethernet network system 4 RUN STOP etc e Perform fil
250. ore information about the net mask pattern for routing other networks see Section 3 3 2 piece asses Net mask pattern for ERES IP address x 1 CC Link IE Controller i l IP address of the _ Logical a Logical and station artnerstation ofthe local r duct Network CC Link IE Field Sum 1 n mb r of the p i staton 1 P Network MELSECNET H OS MELSECNET 10 routing Recipe i b Conversion processing of the IP address computation system 1 When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the IP address is calculated from the Network No and station number of the destination in the communication request message and the communication request message is sent to the next station 1 The Network No and station number of the destination in the communication request message are stored in the Ethernet module 2 The response message response for the communication request message is returned based on the return IP address and the stored data above c IP address computation example The logical sum is calculated differently depending on the class of the local station IP address An IP address is calculated as follows For class A When the local station IP Address is 79238102H When the Net Mask Pattern for routing other networks is FFO00000H When the destination Network No is 03H and the station number is 05H r
251. ored in the Ethernet module 2 Check whether or not any received e mails are stored on the mail server If any receive mail has been stored the receive mail information is stored in the buffer memory 3 Execute the MRECV instruction Read e mails from the server E mails that have been read will not remain on the mail server 4 The flag indicating whether or not there is a receive mail stays on by designating Inquire with MRECV instruction s control data item 5 When reading e mails is completed the MRECV instruction completion device turns on When the completion device 1 abnormal completion signal turns on the error code is stored in the control data completion status S 1 For details on the causes of errors see the User s Manual Basic 6 Execute the MRECV instruction Continue to read e mails remaining on the mail server 1 Reading receive mails to the Ethernet module The Ethernet module automatically checks the mail server to see whether there is any incoming mail at the inquiry interval set with a programming tool If there are any receive mails addressed to the local station the reception information is stored in the buffer memory the MRECV instruction should be executed based on this information 2 When there are two or more receive mails on the mail server By designating Inquire in the MRECV instruction s control data the Ethernet module also reads the information of the remaining receive mails on
252. ork module The abbreviation for interface modules compatible with the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 network N W module system OPEN The abbreviation for ZP OPEN A generic term for personal computers computers work station WS and Ethernet module etc that are connected by the Ethernet for data communication External device Programming tool A generic term for GX Developer and GX Works2 acPu A generic term for a Basic model QCPU High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Redundant CPU and Universal model QCPU A generic term for the QOIUDVCPU QO4UDVCPU QO6UDVCPU Q13UDVCPU and QnUDVEPU Q26UDVCPU G series Ethernet mod l rei for the QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 and QJ71E71 B2 Ethernet interface Basic model QCPU A generic term for the QOOJCPU QOOCPU and Q01CPU ru efformance model A generic term for the Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU Process CPU A generic term for the Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU A generic term for the QOOUJCPU QOOUCPU Q01UCPU QO2UCPU QO3UDCPU QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDHCPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU Universal model QCPU QO6UDHCPU QO6UDVCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDHCPU Q13UDVCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Q26UDHCPU Q26UDVCPU Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU and Q100UDEHCPU A generic term for the QO3UDVCPU QO3UDECPU Q04UDVCPU Q04UDEHCPU Built i
253. ption of setting Setting range option CPU status Device monitoring 1 monitoring Condition for PLC Inspection No Setting Normal STOP e Serious Fatal Error e Warning STOP Moderate error STOP CPU Normal RUN Warning RUN Moderate Error STOP e PAUSE Select the monitoring condition for the Attached File Form Send Attached File Select the data send method Send Text Mail x O Set the data format for the attached EAER file Attached File Name Set the attached file name O Or i e Up to 8 characters PLC Inquiry Interval Input Format of Inspection Value Set time interval between reading the CPU status and device values and e 30 s to 24h the units h min s e HEX monitoring data Condition Device Set the condition device e o O e A device in the CPU module Condition for Inspection _ Set the monitoring condition A EA eee Monitoring Value Set the monitoring value a ae o i e 32768 to 32767 News Data Storage Device News Data Points Maximum points for a device e Word device 960 points e Bit device 8192 points Total number of points e Total number of news data points 1920 bytes One bit point is rounded up to one word point O Setting item X Setting not required 1 When an e mail is sent with the programmable controller status inspection only subject programmable controller CPU status is stored is sent Set the news data points 1 Condition for PLC inspe
254. quotation of the first argument can be omitted N Description of setting Setting range Start I O signal of the local station Ethernet module Designate by higher two digits when the I O signal is 0 to FEH expressed by three digits Control data storage head device S Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device 5 the control data Send data storage head device Designate the head device of the local station that stores Word device the receive data Bit device D2 Designate dummy data Word device bit designation 3 2 4 Bit device eee eeen X Y M L F V B 2 Word device Na T C D W ST R ZR 3 Word device bit designation Word device Bit number 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 2 Execution timing of the instruction When executing reception processing by an interrupt program a When normal completion Hg SEND With arrival confirmation Sequence scan 0 END 70 l Send command o Send completion device Device specified with D1 Sending side programmable controller CPU Send completion device D1 1 device OFF Ne ee ee eee ee ee ee eG a eee os ee pe ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee a Ethernet 4 i i Channel1 module l i erro tits a ri e MAA CO AN ee O EE ee EEEE e is 4 Data Storage sending complete O
255. r CPU Does the same file name as the file to be written exist Exists Delete the file with the same name Or change the file name gt Write the file Set the programmable controller CPU to RUN status 1 y C End file write gt MELSEC Q L 2 How to write the sequence program file to Q LCPU FTP operation command No file conversion notification binary lt ret gt Display operation status quote status lt ret gt Change operation status RUN gt STOP status quote stop lt ret gt Password setting in the Ethernet module quote keyword set password lt ret gt or quote passwd wr password lt ret gt Display file list dir lt ret gt or Is lt ret gt Delete file delete FILE TO DELETED lt ret gt Change file rename CURRENT FILE NAME NEW FILE NAME lt ret gt Write file put WRITE SOURCE FILE NAME lt ret gt x1 The Q LCPU must be set to STOP RUN gt STOP gt RUN To restart the operation of the Q LCPU after writing a file it is recommended to set the switch of the Q LCPU to RUN The status of the Q LCPU can be changed from STOP to RUN with the FTP command however pay full attention to the operation of the programmable controller system 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 5 Precautions when Using the File Transfer Functions The precautions when using the Ethernet module FTP server functi
256. ram l l i Receiving side programmable I i l l Sequence scan controller CPU Completion status S 1 device 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 3 Program examples Station 3 uses channel 3 with an SEND instruction and sends data to station 15 using channel 5 When data is received at station 15 data is read from channel 5 Programmable E71 E71 Programmable controller CPU Station number 3 Station number 15 controller CPU Channel 1 Channel 1 _ Channel 2 H F SEND Channels feH Channel 4 Channel 4 L Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 6 _ Channel 7 _ Channel 7 _ Channel 8 _ Channel 8 SS ee Network number No 7 a Station 3 program SEND instruction Same as the program shown in Section 4 5 1 b Program for station number 15 RECVS instruction When the input output signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F EI FEND 150 SM400 7 mov HO D20 MOV K5 D22 J Local station storage channel x19 y Z RECVS U0 20 D300 MIO J X19 Initial normal completion signal IRET Create interrupt enable disable programs in the main program in order to start the interrupt program Use the El DI and IMASK instructions for this To check the descriptions of errors
257. rammable E71 controller CPU controller CPU D10 D50 ZNRD DT ZNWR DS instruction D12 instruction D52 communication D13 communication D53 request request designation D14 destination station station Station 4 Station 3 When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X22 19 HH HE YA 97 ane 1 Ka D10 D200 KS MO X19 Initial normal completion signal d come MO M1 H SET Y30 Normal completion display RST Y31 M1 DON Mov 6207 DO Error code SET Y31 Error completion display RST Y30 b Program of station 2 ZNWR instruction When I O signals of Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F X22 X19 HA A Re 01 K3 D50 D300 K4 m10 X19 Initial normal completion signal ad M10 M11 SET Y30 Normal completion display RST Y31 M1 DO MOV G209 D10 Error code eT bel Error completion display RST Y30 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 8 Reading Writing Clock Data Remote RUN Remote STOP REQ This section explains the format and program examples of the REQ instruction that is used to read write clock data and remote RUN remote STOP of the Q L QnACPU of other stations For details see Sections 6 7 and 6 8 1 Instruction format Network number designation Execution command J REQ Jn S1 S2 D1 D2 J Execution during on Execution command JP Execution JP REQ S1 S2 D1 D2 during sario
258. receive e mails see 4 on page 2 17 The system date for the file name is the data managed by the programmable controller of the station in which the Ethernet module is installed 2 18 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 4 Receiving by a personal computer The following explains how a PC UNIX receives e mails sent from the Ethernet module After setting the environment where the Internet is accessible with a mail user agent receive e mails on the receiving message screen as follows Example The following shows an example of the reception of e mail sent using the MSEND instruction see 3 The following is a screen of Microsoft Corporation s Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 No 1 testmail msend Message Plain Text i File Edit View Insert Format Tools Actions Help C Reply AReply to All CG Forward 4 ER ANS MR Me Foe OL From Mail address of Ethernet module eee a Sent Sun 00 00 0000 00 00 AM To Mail address of external device Cc Subject No 1 testmail msend eee b Attachments E no000000 45 1358 eee c lt Data contents for attached files gt 123456789abc a From Displays the mail address of the Ethernet module By entering the mail addresses of the send destination devices in the address book the registered names display names can be displayed and it makes the management easier b Subject This indicates the No of transmissions 1 and the Subject wri
259. red in the mail send reception error log area of the buffer memory If e mails cannot be received try one of the following 1 Execute the MRECV instruction once 2 Shorten the Enquiry Interval time in the e mail settings of a programming tool 3 Check the number of incoming mails remaining on the mail server Can be checked with the buffer memory address 5870H area When the receive data of an e mail sent using the MSEND instruction is abnormal garbled characters etc review the transmission data format binary ASCII CSV designated with the MSEND instruction The Subject should be designated in ASCII code data It is not converted to ASCII format Confirm with a system administrator regarding the minimum time intervals for accessing the mail server when sending mails reading receive mails and inquiring whether or not there are receive mails Depending on the mail server s security setting frequent access may be prohibited The e mail send reception function using the programmable controller CPU and the communication function using the random access buffer cannot be used together Only one of them can be used at a time The e mail send function using programmable controller CPU monitoring and the communication function using the random access buffer can be used together A Subject that has been sent by the MSEND instruction from an Ethernet module of the following versions cannot be received normally by the M
260. rent access target CPU Designation format quote cpuchg access target CPU Access target CPU Designate the CPU to which file access is to be performed quote cpuchg no2 Designates the CPU No 2 as the access target CPU quote cpuchg no3 Designates the CPU No 3 as the access target CPU quote cpuchg no4 Designates the CPU No 4 as the access target CPU When the command is successfully completed the execution result is displayed as follows When setting the access target CPU 200 Command Okey When displaying the access target CPU 200 Target cpu is access target CPU If the designated access target CPU does not exist the following message is displayed 557 Cpu not found Designation example 1 When designating the access target CPU as the control CPU quote cpuchg controlPLC Designation example 2 When displaying the currently selected access target CPU quote cpuchg Caution The control CPU of the Ethernet module will be the access target CPU after logging in when the OPEN USER command is executed to the Ethernet module 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L password lock Ethernet module dedicated commands Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designates the remote password set in the CPU module as unlocked and performs the lock processing This command is executed if the FTP communication port is designated as a port subject to the remote password chec
261. rnet module The following encoding decoding is supported Chapter 2 e Encode the Subject using 7 bits encoding and send it from the Ethernet module e Decode and receive an e mail encoded with Quoted Printable by the Ethernet module Unlocks locks the remote password of the QCPU The unlock processing enables access to the QCPU using FTP When using the e mail function Support for encoding decoding Remote password the file transfer cheek commands When using Chapter 5 FTP server The QCPU transfers files to the control CPU non control CPU function Support for multiple of the Ethernet module when a multiple CPU system CPU systems ee configuration is used 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q L 2 Function added for function version D Reference Function Overview section Sending character strings in the e mail s main text by the programmable controller CPU monitoring function When using the e mail function The programmable controller CPU monitoring function allows transmission of character string information stored in word Chapter 2 devices by the e mail s main text In the following data link instructions the target station number 65 to 120 can be specified Specification of the station number 65 to 120 in the CC Link IE Controller Network Specifying target station number in and CC Link IE Field Network is available data link instructions e SEND e READ SREAD e WRITE SWRITE RE
262. rnet module converts the attached file from binary to CSV 4 Attached file name Designate the name of an attached file If a file name is not designated the Ethernet module automatically names it and sends the file named mmddhhss month date hour minute same as for e mail sending Send Text Mail 5 PLC inquiry interval Designate the interval for the Ethernet module to read the CPU status and device values from the programmable controller CPU The user can designate any inquiry time interval time within the ranges listed below Setting range default 5 min 1 to 24 1 to 1440 30 to 3600 6 Input format of inspection value Select the input format decimal hexadecimal of the monitoring value 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 7 Condition device Designate the device to be monitored 1 A maximum of 16 devices can be monitored 2 Itis possible to designate devices that can be accessed for communication using the MC protocol directly as condition devices see the Reference Manual In this case Timer Retentive timer and Counter should be designated by T ST or C The following devices cannot be designated e Step relay S e Direct input DX e Direct output DY e Index qualification e Indirect designation 3 After completion of the news setting the system will rearrange the condition devices in the order word devices first and then bit devices Display the news setting screen again
263. rol data The target station must be connected to other networks or Ethernet The sent data is stored in the channel set with the target station s S2 Use the RECV RECVS instruction when reading the data sent on the target station When data sending to the target station number is completed the completion device designated in D turns on Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module Channel 1 S2 Channel 1 S1 2 RECV S1 3 m Channel n a alcala isc Channel n Channel 8 Channel 8 Ethernet 2 Data can be sent to stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the specified numbers in addition to stations connected to the local station s network 3 The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction 4 Whether the SEND instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D
264. rs to be set and registered 1 The programmable controller CPU of the communication request source station The programmable controller CPU of the stations relay reception station and relay transmission station that relay communication request messages The programmable controller CPU of the stations relay reception station and relay transmission station that relay response messages 1 The routing parameters setting is not necessary for the other station access on the same Ethernet network as the external device local station Q LCPU 2 The routing parameters are designated in the following manner To go to a station on the network No O relay through the station No O on the network No A which is the first communication relay A from the local station Y Relay Station No Target Network No Relay Network No 3 As an example to perform other station access from station 1Ns3 to 3Ns4 in the diagram in the next page the following values are set to the stations which require the routing parameter setting e Communication request source station Station 1Ns3 e Communication relay station Station 1Ns4 2Mp1 and Station 2Ns4 3Ns5 The code used for each station in the diagram indicates the Network No of other networks or Ethernet station type and station number A maximum of 64 Target Network No can be set in the Q LCPU 64 types of Network No can be accessed to other station via lo
265. ry values are recorded from the lower byte L side e If the data format is ASCII target values are converted to 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII codes and recorded from the higher byte H side of the values e If the data format is CSV target values are converted to 4 digit hexadecimal ASCII codes and recorded from the higher byte H side of the values If multiple word data is to be processed insert a comma between each word 4 byte ASCII code data Insert CR Code ODH and LF Code 0An every each setting device range Example In case of M15 to MO 0001H M31 to M16 0002n WO 001An W1 002Bn For M15 to MO M15 to M12 to M8 to M4 to MO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 For binary Wo L Wo H W1 L W1 H DO L DO H D1 L D1 H D8 L D8 H D9 L D9 H 1A 00 2B 00 11 00 12 00 TESSA 19 00 1A 00 MO M8 M16 M24 M72 X10X18 X20 X38 B10B18 B40B48 0100 0200 0300 04 00 05 00 60 00 61 00 62 00 30 00 3300 For ASCII wo W1 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 001A 002B 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 00160017 0018 0019 001A MO M16 M32 M48 M64 X10 X20 X30 B10 B20 B30 B40 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0060 0061 0062 0030 0031 0032 0033 For CSV Wo w1 001A 0028 OR LE DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 00160017 0018 0019 001a OR LE MO M16 M32 M48 M64 CR LF 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 X10 X20 X30 0060 0061 0062 CR LF B10
266. s Thus when executing dedicated instructions on programmable controller CPUs other than Q LCPUs the data portion of the higher two digits of the year is treated as 00H All dedicated instructions must be executed online If any of the dedicated instructions is executed offline no error will occur but the execution of the dedicated instruction will not be completed When accessing another station via an Ethernet module using a data link instruction set the following parameters Refer to Section 3 3 e Station No lt gt IP information settings e Routing parameter settings 2 Available devices The following devices are available for the dedicated instructions Internal devices f f x2 Eq File register Constant XY MLFVB TST C DW x1 Word device bit designation can be used as bit data Word device bit designation is done by designating Word device Bit No Designation of bit numbers is done in hexadecimal For example bit 10 of DO is designated as DO A However there can be no bit designation for timers T retentive timers ST and counters C x2 Available devices are given in each of the Constant field 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 2 ZP MRECV This instruction reads received e mails Applicable device Set i Link direct device Intelligent Internal device f i Constant data File register JOO function module Index register Zn O K H device UGO i
267. s the equation above when multiple news conditions are satisfied when monitoring multiple condition devices 2 When multiple bit devices are to be designated be aware of following e One device occupies 16 device points 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 9 2 Receiving a news e mail The designated external device side can open the news e mail from the Ethernet module in the same way as opening a mail received from the programmable controller CPU 1 When monitoring the CPU status a When the result of the CPU status monitoring matches the monitoring condition the Subject will be sent The attached file or main text will not be sent b The following shows the contents for the Subject sent No kxk o Status gt gt Time yyyy mm dd hh mm ss No of transmissions 1 CPU model name Status Detection time 1 This is the number automatically added each time an Ethernet module sends an e mail The numbers are counted up from 1 When the number reaches 4294967296 the number is cleared to 0 Then the numbers are counted up from 0 again to 4294967296 Send contents of the parts for the status CPU module status Send contents At module warning occurrence Status RUN Warning or Status RUN Slight Abnormal Atnormal Status STOP During STOP At module warning occurrence Status STOP Waming or Status STOP Slight Abnormal During the module error or module system error During Pause
268. s turned on for one scan by completion of the D2 instruction System Bit D2 1 turns on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The READ instruction can be executed only when the target station is the Q L QnACPU The READ instruction cannot be executed for an ACPU connected to the MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet Therefore the target station numbers should be the station numbers of Q L QNACP U only When reading data from the other station CPU module device with the READ instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be read in other station CPU module S2 number of read points 1 lt last device number of host station CPU module gt Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as S2 Use the file register ZR when specifying the expansion data register D or the expansion link register W that are out of area of the data register D or the link register W on the host CPU module respectively excluding the Universal model QCPU and the LCPU For how to calculate areas for the file register ZR refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used Example When not assigning the data register D of the other station CP
269. series Ethernet module dedicated command Function Designation format Designation example 1 Designation example 2 Designation example 3 Caution Sets the registered read password of the target file for file transfer in the Ethernet module Or display clear the current read password set in the Ethernet module Use this command only if a read password is registered in the target file of file transfer The Ethernet module performs a password check when the designated file is accessed quote passwd rd read password One of the following is displayed as the execution result for a successful completion When setting a read password 200 Command successful When displaying a read password 200 Read password is read password When clearing a read password 200 Command successful When displaying a read password with the read password not set 200 Read password is not set To set the read password ABCD1234 efgh to the Ethernet module quote passwd rd ABCD1234 efgh To display the read password currently set in the Ethernet module quote passwd rd To clear the read password currently set in the Ethernet module quote passwd rd c or quote passwd rd C One read password can be set in the Ethernet module If the target file for file transfer changes and a password is registered in the file which is at the changed destination set the read password for the new target file in the Ethernet module again Upon login to the Ether
270. set to With arrival confirmation if the send station sends data to the same channel of the receive station before the receive station reads data using the RECV instruction a buffer full error will occur on the send station side Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet Ethernet controller CPU send station N W module N W module receive station Channel 3 HHREcW Channel 5 Designate the target station sending data with the network No and station No of the network module or Ethernet module receiving the request from the send station In the diagram below designate the network No and station No of the first Ethernet module The SEND instruction cannot be executed if a network module or Ethernet module other than the one receiving the request from the send station is designated x In the diagram below the SEND instruction cannot be executed if the network No and station No of the second Ethernet module is designated Network No 1 Network No 2 Ethernet Ethernet Send station CPU module module module HH SEND Target 1st 2nd station 6 The number of resends S1 7 must be set at every instruction execution 6 42 6 42 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Functions 1 This instruction sends data stored in the devices designated with the local station s S2 to the station designated with the target station network number and target station number in the cont
271. sion data register D or the expansion link register W that are out of area of the data register D or the link register W on the host CPU module respectively excluding the Universal model QCPU and the LCPU For how to calculate areas for the file register ZR refer to the User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for the CPU module used Example When not assigning the data register D of the other station CPU module or assigning all of the 32K points of the file register ZR to the expansion data register D y Other station Host CPU module 1 CPU module Expansion data F ne Data register render Specify within DO to 12287 ZR12287 ZR12288 Specify within ZR12288 to 32767 ZR32767 1 File register with 32K points or more is required for the host CPU 4 The number of resends S1 7 must be set at every instruction execution 1 Setting values stored in Completion status S1 1 and Clock data S1 10 to S1 14 are stored into control data upon completion of the instruction 2 The number of steps for the WRITE instruction is 10 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Control data Set data Setting range _Set by to b8 b7 0 3 2 1 Execution type bit 0 0 No arrival confirmation When the target station is on the same network Completed when the data is sent from the local station gt Complete Execution source Target station
272. st type AA _ __ MOV H1 D22 Forced execution not performed X22 X19 7 mov K5 D7 Number of resend Write command TJP REQ J7 DO D20 D30 MO X19 Initial normal completion signal a A E Cl Processing program when instruction completion Mi ears 7 Bn tee ee cet e A y Processing program when normal completion PRSIA as T Processing program when abnormal completion I 1 Read error code etc mov D1 Mop i ft 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 6 8 J P G P REQ Clock Data Read Write This instruction reads writes clock data from to other stations See Section 6 7 for the following information on the REQ instruction for reading writing clock data from to other stations Since the same explanation as when executing remote RUN STOP operations using the REQ instruction applies in this case the explanation of these items is omitted in this section Instruction format Devices that can be used with the instruction Control data in the setting data Functions Error Request data All items marked with are set by the user Clock data Clock data Device Item Set data read write 0001 Clock data read 0011 Clock data write When station No is specified in S2 Request type S1 5 0031H Clock data write When all stations or a group is specified in S1 5 0002 Clock data read S2 1 Sub request type 00011 Clock data write 1 Change pa
273. station s Ethernet module Character st 00 to FEx The higher 2 digits of the 3 digit 1 O signal ARSIS Character sting Head device of the local station that stores the control data Head device of the local station that stores data to be written oo Device name a Head device of the target station to which data is written Local station device that is turned on for one scan by the completion of the instruction System Bit D2 1 is turned on if the instruction execution completes abnormally The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as devices used in setting data 6 56 6 56 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The WRITE instruction can be executed only when the target station is the Q L QnACPU The WRITE instruction cannot be executed for an ACPU connected to the MELSECNET 10 or Ethernet network systems Therefore the target station numbers should be the station numbers of Q L QnACPU When writing data from the other station CPU module device with the WRITE instruction specify the device within the range applicable to the host station CPU module Head device number to be write in other station CPU module D1 number of write points 1 lt last device number of host station CPU module gt x Last device number in host station CPU module having the same device name as D1 Use the file register ZR when specifying the expan
274. ta write and remote RUN STOP are allowed 3 All stations FFu All stations of the target network number simultaneous broadcast excluding the local station only clock data write and remote RUN STOP are allowed Gps Fixedvalue 1 At instruction execution Set the number of resends when the execution of an instruction did not complete within the monitoring time designated by S1 8 User S1 7 Number of resends 0 a 15 AS System 2 At instruction completion Store the number of resends executed result 0 to 15 times Set the monitoring time until the instruction completion so that it is greater than or equal to the TCP resend timer value When the instruction fails to complete within the monitoring time a itis resent for the number of resends designated in S1 7 Sure Ae monitoring tme 0 to TCP resend timer value The monitoring time is reset to 0 t0 16383 User the TCP resend timer value TCP resend timer value 1 to 16383 The monitoring time is the designated value unit s Designate the number of request data word Word count of data stored in the request data storage device S2 Remote RUN 4 S1 9 Request data length Remote STOP 3 2to4 6 User Clock data read 2 Clock data write 6 Store the number of response data word Word count of data stored in the response data storage device S1 10 Response data length O n RUN STOP 2 Clock data read 6 Clock data write 2 This data is stored only when the bit 7 of
275. tations having the target network number simultaneous broadcasting Excluding the local station Can be set when the execution type designated in S1 is 0 No arrival confirmation see Fixed value lo user Valid when the execution type designated in S1 is 1 With arrival confirmation 1 At instruction execution Set the number of resends when the instruction fails Numberf reseids to complete within the monitoring time designated by 0to 15 User S1 8 System 0 to 15 Time 2 At instruction completion Store the number of resends executed result 0 to 15 Time Valid when the execution type designated in S1 is 1 With arrival confirmation Set the monitoring time until the instruction completion equals to or becomes greater than the TCP resend timer value When the instruction fails to complete within the et A monitoring time it is resent for the number of resends 0 to 16383 S1 8 Arrival monitoring time designated in S1 7 0 to TCP 0 to TCP resend timer value The monitoring time is reset to the TCP resend timer value TCP resend timer value 1 to 16383 Monitoring time unit s Designate the number of send data in S2 to S2 n S1 9 Send data length When sending to Q LCPU 1 to 960 word 1 to 960 User When sending to QnACPU 1 to 480 word 81 10 Notused Pe Store the valid invalid status of the clock data in S1 12 to S1 17 This data is stored only when t
276. tations shown in the diagram e Network system CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 A Network number 1 control station station number 1 Station number Control station normal station Mp Control station Ns Normal station ANUCPU QnACPU QCPU Normal station Other than ANUCPU QnACPU and QCPU Network number 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 4 Using the example of a system shown below the accessible stations and the stations that require parameter settings when an external device or Q LCPU access other stations are explained Stations that require the setting of the setting the Ethernet router relay parameter as mentioned in the User s Manual Basic are also shown 1 External device External device CPU Ethemet module eee 2 Ethernet Ethernet Bic pdeldevian Sees module module Ethernet a Ethernet module Network module CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 4 CPU Network Network module module CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 5 External device Ethernet Ethernet module Network module Router Ethernet module External device Ethernet Access destination
277. tch is fixed data The format of the Subject is as follows see Section 2 9 2 e When monitoring the CPU status Subject No of transmissions 1 CPU model name Status Detection time e When monitoring the CPU device Subject No of transmissions 1 Matched condition device Monitoring value 1 This is the number automatically added each time an Ethernet module sends an e mail The numbers are counted up from 1 When the number reaches 4294967296 the number is cleared to 0 Then the numbers are counted up from O again to 4294967296 The e mail transmission function of the programmable controller CPU and the communication function using the random access buffer can be used together 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 2 Configuration and Environment of the Applicable System This section explains the environment and system configuration for using the e mail function from the Ethernet module Internet service provider Internet service provider Public line OO OOO Router Ethernet DI il ON Proxy server DNS server SMTP POP3 Mail server
278. the Ethernet module side when an interrupt request is made to the programmable controller CPU from the Ethernet module 2 Intelligent Function Module Interrupt Pointer Setting screen Associate the control number SI set in the Ethernet Interrupt Settings above with the interrupt pointer Ixx used in the sequence program The settings on the two screens above are the same as when received data is read by an interrupt program in the fixed buffer communication For details on the settings and setting method on these screens see the User s Manual Basic 1 To start an interrupt program the following settings with a programming tool and interrupt permission in a sequence program are required Interrupt settings in the network parameter screen and intelligent function module interrupt pointer setting e Create interrupt enable disable programs in the main program in order to start an interrupt program Use the El DI and IMASK instructions for this 2 In cases where receive data is read on the same channel the main program for reading receive data and the interrupt program for reading receive data can not be used together Please use one of the programs to read receive data x Received data cannot be read with the main program when the settings to read receive data with an interrupt program are being configured using a programming tool 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LI
279. the channel used completion device D2 or completion status display flag D2 1 designated in the set data a Completion device D2 Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SREAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Status display device at completion D2 1 Turns on and off depending on the completion status of the SREAD instruction Normal completion Stays off and does not change Abnormal completion Turns on at the END processing of the scan where the SREAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Operation of the local station when the SREAD instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program ES a ON SREAD instruction execution is completed he SREAD instruction BEE ete ts ON 2 E A A i Send receive OFF i y direction flag ON OFF Completion device lt A Abnormal l l O completion A Normal Status display device OFF _ _ er ad completion y at completion One scan Operation of the other station when the SREAD instruction is being executed END END END END processing processing processing processing Sequence program gt z4 2 Completion device ont 5 Errors Program example device data designated with ON the SREAD instruction
280. the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 120 Station number 1 The Set by column indicates the following e User Data is set by the user before executing a dedicated instruction e System The programmable controller CPU stores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 2 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic x3 Nothing is stored if the execution source detects an error when receiving an instruction Abnormal detection station eu number 3 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L The following explains the reception processing on the target station by the send data length of the SEND instruction The allowable send data length S1 9 of the SEND instruction varies depending on the version See the User s Manual Basic Specifying a length value outside the setting range will cause a 4101 error OPERATION ERROR on the local station lt When the target station is an Ethernet module gt Target station RECV RECVS Target station RECV Q series Ethernet module QnA series Ethernet module Local station L series Supporting Not supporting receive data length of SEND Ethernet receive data 960 words 480 words QE71N RETRASO words module length of 960 Function version B D Function version A 480 words 9707B or 9706 or words later earlier 1 to 480 words 481 to 960 words O Performs the processing normally x Terminates abnorma
281. the function used Address 00004 may be indicated after some function names This address indicates the buffer memory address of the Ethernet module in which the setting values from a programming tool are stored For more details on the buffer memory see the User s Manual Basic Open the network parameter screens as follows QCPU Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET LCPU Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE Field About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following generic terms and abbreviations to describe the QJ71E71 100 QJ71E71 B5 QJ71E71 B2 and LJ71E71 100 Ethernet interface modules unless otherwise specified ACPU A generic term for the ANNCPU AnACPU and AnUCPU AnACPU A generic term for the AZACPU AZACPU S1 A2Z2ACPUP21 R21 A2ACPUP21 R21 1 A3ACPU and ASACPUP21 R21 AnNCPU A generic term for the A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 R21 A2ZNCPU A2NCPU S1 A2NCPUP21 R21 A2NCPUP21 R21 S1 A3NCPU and ASZNCPUP21 R21 A generic term for the A2UCPU A2UCPU S1 A2ASCPU AZASCPU S1 ASUCPU and AnUCPU AAUCPU BUFRCV The abbreviation for ZP BUFRCV BUFRCVS The abbreviation for Z BUFRCVS BUFSND The abbreviation for ZP BUFSND CLOSE The abbreviation for ZP CLOSE A programmable controller CPU that controls connected I O modules and intelligent function modules Control CPU f In a multiple CPU system there
282. ting status of each station after a communication failure refer to relevant manuals for the network Erroneous outputs and malfunctions may lead to accidents Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e To prevent the malfunction of the programmable controller system due to harmful e mails take preventive measures such as antivirus measures so that the mail server for this module does not receive harmful e mails e To maintain the safety of the programmable controller system against unauthorized access from external devices via the Internet take appropriate measures e When connecting a peripheral with the CPU module or connecting an external device such as a personal computer with an intelligent function module to modify data of a running programmable controller configure an interlock circuit in the program to ensure that the entire system will always operate safely For other forms of control such as program modification or operating status change of a running programmable controller read the relevant manuals carefully and ensure that the operation is safe before proceeding Especially when a remote programmable controller is controlled by an external device immediate action cannot be taken if a problem occurs in the programmable controller due to a communication failure To prevent this configure an interlock circuit in the program and determine corrective actions to be taken between the external device a
283. ting the execution type Setting option Description of processing e Execute only the read processing of e mails from the mail server Even if mails remain on the mail f No extra read As Inquire read about information O server they cannot be read Do nat inquire i y EN processing is executed i on receive mails remaining on immediately Do not read when there are no mails the mail server after the time set Mails tend to accumulate on the on the mail server in a programming tool mail server parameter Execute the read processing of e mails from the mail server After executing the MRECV E Inquiries to the mail server are instruction the inquiry read Receive mails stored on more frequent Inquire Read processing of information on the mail server can be a More processing in the module receive mails remaining on the read in succession affects other internal processing mail server is also executed Inquire whether or not mails are received immediately x4 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic Functions 1 This instruction reads receive mails from the mail server CPU module Ethernet module Mail server MRECV Un S D1 D2 Destination mail address Buffer memory Header ee Header Subject etc Attached file 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 2 Ifa received e mail contains data exceeding the recept
284. tion Ethernet module LCPU Ethernet Ethernet module MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station Control station Normal station Remote master station Multiple remote master station Parallel remote master station Multiple remote submaster station Parallel remote submaster station ICC Link IE Controller Network ICC Link IE Controller Network Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Submaster station Control station Normal station Control station extended mode Normal station extended mode ICC Link IE Field Network Master station Local station Intelligent device station Submaster station 1 The instruction cannot be used when the source or target station is a safety CPU 2 Up to the channel 2 can be used in the CC Link IE Field Network x3 The following interface boards for a personal computer with the SEND RECV function are accessible e CC Link IE Controller Network interface board e CC Link IE Field Network interface board e MELSECNET H board e MELSECNET 10 board 4 8 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER O
285. tion processing of the Q L QnACPU device memory should be performed when the Q L QnACPU starts performing calculations after a remote RUN request has been issued to it The Q L QnACPU executes the designated clear and then goes into the RUN status according to the parameter settings PLC File Initial Device Value 6 The number of resends S1 7 must be set at every instruction execution Functions 1 This instruction sends the request data designated in S2 of the local station to the station connected to other networks or Ethernet that has been specified with the network number and station number in the control data to make a service request When the request to the target station is completed the completion device designated with D2 turns on Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module S2 Channel 1 RUN STOP REQ gt Channel n Clock data P reads writes Channel 8 Ethernet 2 Device data can be sent from stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the specified numbers in addition to stations connected to the local station s network 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 3 The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or mor
286. tion data length les data System __ o C to 960 Word count of receive data S 10 Not used IN r the valid invalid status of the data in S 12 to S 17 This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the S 11 Clock set flag dedicated instruction is normally completed System 0 Invalid 1 Valid The clock data upon abnormal end is stored in BCD This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed b8 b7 Clock data set only if an error Month 01H to 12H System occurs Hour 00H to 23H Date 01H to 314 Second 00H to 59H Minute 00H to 59H 00H Sun to 06H Sat Stores the network No of the station that detected an abnormality This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete type S 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 239 Network No Stores the station number of the station that detected an abnormality Abnormal detection station This data is stored only when the bit 7 of Abnormal complete number 3 type S 0 is 1 The stored value is not cleared even when the dedicated instruction is normally completed 1 to 120 Station number Abnormal detection network number 3 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions
287. tions ACPU Applicable device Link direct device Intelligent function module gt Can only use T C D W Instruction Executing symbol condition Command J ZNRD i Command 1 2 Setting data Description Setting range Set by Data type Target station network number Designates the network number of the target 1 to 239 Binary 16 bits station Target station number Designates the station number of the target 1 to 64 Constant Character string station Data read storage head device target station Designates the head device of the target station that stores data to be read Data read storage head device local station Designates the head device of the local station that stores the data read Continued to the next page 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Setting data DN Description O Setting range Set by Data type When reading from Q L QnA AnUCPU Length of data read 1 to 230 Constant Designates the number of data word count to When reading from User Binary 16 bits be read programmable controller CPUs other than Q L QnA AnUCPU Read complete device local station Designate device that is turned on for one scan by the read completion System Bit D2 off Incomplete on Complete D2 1 off Normal on Abnormal 1 The local devices and the file register for each program cannot be used as the device used for the setting data 2 In addition
288. to 99x Year Lower two digits Higher 8 bits hour 00H to 23H lower 8 bits date 01H to 31H Higher 8 bits second 00H to 59H lower 8 bits minute 00H to 59H Higher 8 bits 00x D1 5 lower 8 bits day of the week 00H Sunday to 06H Saturday D1 3 Clock data read D1 4 The clock data cannot be written when the system protection is activated on the target station s Q L QnACPU When the clock data is read the response data storage device D1 requires a contiguous free area of six words 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Program example The following example shows a program to write the clock data 8 30 00 to the Q L QnACPU with the station number 13 in the network number 7 When I O signals of the Ethernet module are X Y00 to X Y1F Mov H91 DO Clock data setting required MOV KI D2 J Channel used by the local station MOV HSFF D3 Target station s CPU type Control CPU c O K7 D4 J Target station network number Mov K13 D5 Target station number MOV K20 D8 J Arrival monitoring time 20 s te mov K6 D9 Request data length 6 words X21 it mov H11 D20 Y Request type Request data setting command MOV H1 D21 Y Subrequest type nov H38 D22 Y Change pattern MOV H3008 D24 1 Hour minute 8 30 Mov Ho D25 Second 00s X22 X19 y MOV KS D7 J Number of resend Write command uP REQ u7 D0 D
289. to a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liabl
290. to confirm the condition device settings 8 Condition for inspection Designate the news conditions to monitor the devices of the programmable controller CPU The following table lists the comparison conditions for the designated device No conditional settings Character String For each monitoring Selectable when Send text mail and Word device are send set for Send method and Condition device respectively Device value monitoring value When the monitoring device value and the value set by the user are the same Device value monitoring value When the monitoring device value and the value set by the user are different y When the monitoring device value is equal to or less than the value set by the Device value lt monitoring value unsigned SHE Device value lt monitoring value unsigned When the monitoring device value is less than the value set by the user Word device When the monitoring device value is equal to or greater than the value set by Device value gt monitoring value unsigned A A ser Device value gt monitoring value Device value gt monitoring value unsigned When the monitoring device value is greater than the value set When the monitoring device value is greater than the value set by the user the user When the monitoring device value is equal to or less than the value set by the Device value lt monitoring value signed TEA Device value lt monitoring value Device
291. tores the execution result of a dedicated instruction 3 For a list of error codes see the User s Manual Basic The allowable receive data length S 9 of the RECVS instruction varies depending on the version See the User s Manual Basic Specifying a length value outside the setting range will cause a 4101 error OPERATION ERROR on the local station 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS Functions Errors MELSEC Q L 1 This instruction reads the data received from other stations a station connected to other networks or Ethernet at the local station storage channel S 2 designated in the control data Data is sent using the SEND instruction When data is received from the transmission station the receive data is stored in the channel of the local station designated with the transmission station and the interrupt program with the interrupt number Ixx set with a programming tool is started The receive data is read using the RECVS instruction in this interrupt program Local station Response station Programmable Programmable controller CPU Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module D1 Interrupt Channel 1 D1 Channel 1 occurrence RECVS Channel n ej __ SEND 8 2 Channel n 4 7 Channel 8 Channel 8 Interrupt program Instruction execution Data are Receive ala Teoenving data storage 2 The Z RECVS instruction is used in the interrupt pro
292. toring Timer 10 x 500ms 1 32767 Default Check End Cancel FTP parameter settings Description of setting Setting range Selections Not Used FTP Select whether or not to use the FTP function U Use p ae ae Up to 12 characters Set the login name when a communication destination requests 7 Login Name i h Initial login name login file transfer to the Ethernet module by external device QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 ae eee Up to 8 characters Set the password when a communication destination requests a Current Initial password file transfer to the Ethernet module by external device Password QJ71E71 or LJ71E71 Set the new password when a communication destination Up to 8 characters requests file transfer to the Ethernet module by external device Command ai gi tial Monitoring Set the monitoring time for the Ethernet module to monitor the 4 to 32767 o ai gi tial command input time from the FTP client Ma Set the monitoring time for the Ethernet module to monitor the PLC Monitoring Timer f 1 to 32767 operation of the local station s CPU 1 FTP Address 4H b8 b9 Default value Do not use the FTP function Set whether or not to use the FTP function of the Ethernet module Explanation a the FTP function Do not use the FTP function not use the FTP function 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 2 Log in name and password Address 3B0H 3B6H Default value QJ7
293. toring time The formula is shown using the following system configuration example Communication request source station Communication request destination station am 1 Pe READ instruction 1 channel used Arrival monitoring time gt St x 2 Dt Rt St Sequence scan time of the CPU module on the communication request A source station Dt Communication processing time between the Ethernet modules on the communication request source station and on the communication request destination station Rt Response time of the CPU module on the communication request destination station a Sequence scan time of the CPU module on the communication request source station St The sequence scan time can be checked by Current scan time SD520 SD521 b Communication processing time between the Ethernet modules on the communication request source station and on the communication request destination station Dt Use the processing time of the dedicated instructions described in the User s Manual Basic App 1 App 1 APPENDIX MELSEC Q L c Response time of the CPU module on the communication request destination station Rt Find the value by the following formula Sequence scan time x Number of scans before executing service processing The sequence scan time can be checked by Current scan time SD520 SD521 For service proc
294. troller CPU Monitoring Function s 2 32 A 12 A 12 2 95 NEWS SENI S Aa A E AI A EA EIS A Aai 2 32 2 9 2 Receiving a news e Mail ooooonninnicnnnnnnnnninini 2 37 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS 3 1 to 3 22 3 1 CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 Relay Communication FUNGUO arresa s erarani anaray r eeni Naa ra aR PAREA RANA ATAA NA APTENT E AAEE E AR E aia 3 1 3 2 Range of Accessible Other Station s Programmable Controllers and Accessible Stations 3 2 3 2 1 Accessible range and statlon ianareo e aE i A EERE 3 2 3 3 Settings for Accessing Other Stati0MS ooonnnonnicniininnonnconconnconncanccnnncnn cri n cnn rra 3 5 3 3 1 Setting the Station No lt gt IP Informations siine ai AR iraia 3 6 3 3 2 Convert format between the Network No station number and IP address port number 3 9 3 3 3 Routing parameter Settings eccecseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeseeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseaeseeeseaeseeseneseneeaes 3 15 3 4 Procedure for Accessing Other Stations ecceceeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeeeeeseaeeeaeseseaeeeaes 3 21 3 5 Precautions for Accessing Other Stations cceccecesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeesenseneeeaes 3 21 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION 4 1 to 4 42 4 1 Access to Other Stations with the Data
295. ts of setting values for the TCP resend timer setting value units 0 5 s and the arrival monitoring timer setting value units s are different the TCP resend timer value is used as is 3 Checking the execution result of each data link instruction The execution result completion status of each data link instruction is stored in the areas shown as binary values After the execution of an instruction is completed read the execution result from the storage area and verify either normal or abnormal completion Stored value at normal completion 0 Stored value at abnormal completion A value other than O error code When an error code that indicates abnormal completion is stored take an action by seeing the Troubleshooting section in the User s Manual Basic Storage area of execution result SEND RECV RECVS i The completion status storage device of the control data storage READ SREAD device of the instruction used WRITE SWRITE ZNRD Data link instruction execution result Address CFu 207 ZNWR storage area in buffer memory Address D14 209 4 Clock data when each of the data link instructions ends abnormally In the clock data stored as control data when each of the data link instructions ends abnormally set only upon an error the year data upper 2 digits is stored only when the Q LCPU is the error detection station If the error detection station is not a Q LCPU 004 is stored 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PRO
296. tten by a sequence program 1 This is the number automatically added each time an Ethernet module sends an e mail The numbers are counted up from 1 When the number reaches 4294967296 the number is cleared to 0 Then the numbers are counted up from 0 again to 4294967296 c Attached file This indicates the name of the attached file sent by the Ethernet module Data in the attached file in CSV format can be read in cell units in Excel etc for each 1 word of data 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 2 7 2 When receiving data in the attached file This section explains the MRECV instruction and a program to receive e mails sent from external devices The MRECV instruction reads the attached file received 1 2 3 4 HH ZP MRECV Un S D2 Mail server _ Read a y g Header ee a y VO No ain text of mai Attached file Qn CPU QJ71E71 Header attached file 1 I O number of the Ethernet module 2 Control data such as mail No to be read 3 Storage device of header attached file 4 Complete bit Receive mail is temporarily stored in the buffer memory shown below Address re i Item Description Remarks hexadecimal 2680H Indicates the size of received e mail header attached file data 2681H Indicates the size of the header data 2682H Mail information E Indicates the head address where the attached file data information is 2683H Head address of attache
297. ttern bits O to 7 Specify which items are to be written to the fields of high byte of S2 2 to S2 5 0 Do not change 1 Change 2 Year to be changed bits 8 to 15 Store year last two digits of the year in the Gregorian Change pattern calendar as BCD code Year to be changed b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 Year 00H to 99H O E Year Month Date Hour Minute Second Day of the week Higher 8 bits date 01H to 314 lower 8 bits month 01H to 12h Higher 8 bits minute 00H to 59 Clock data to be changed ld A ISI iS 000900 lower 8 bits hour 00H to 23H continued Higher 8 bits day of the week 00H Sunday to 06x Saturday lower 8 bits second 00H to 59H In this function the higher two digits of the year data cannot be changed When it is necessary to change the higher two digits of the year data use other functions such as a programming tool to set the clock data 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L Request data All items marked with are set by the user When all stations or a group FFH or 81H to AOH is specified in Target station No S1 5 no response data will be stored Clock data Clock data Device Item Set data read write 0081H Clock data read D1 0 Request type 0091 Clock data write When station No is specified in S1 5 CTN Se A RE D1 1 Sub request type 0001 Clock data write Higher 8 bits month 01H to 12H D1 2 lower 8 bits year 00H
298. uch foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction e A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Startup and Maintenance Precautions Al WARNING e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module Failure to do so may result in electric shock Startup and Maintenance Precautions A CAUTION e Do not disassemble or modify the module Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction e After the first use of the product module and display unit the number of connections disconnections is limited to 50 times in accordance with IEC 61131 2 Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction e Before handling the module touch a conducting object such as a grounded metal to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Operating Precautions AX CAUTION e When changing data and operating status and modifying program of the running programmable controller from an external device such as a personal computer connected to an intelligent funct
299. ue e A 6 5 3 0 0 0 we a He E OQ ol an O 1 r gt e z ri Qa e oO Bo Si O gt o a wo o o N 1 Sale See eee A esie 4 IP address configuration of class A 31 30 to 2423 to 1615 to Network Host address IP address configuration of class B 31 3029 to 1615 to Class Network address Host address e IP address configuration of class C 31 to 2928 to 87 to Class Network address Host address o o o 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 Table exchange system a Overview of the table exchange system 1 This method uses the Network No station number and IP address set in the conversion table of the Station No lt gt IP information and uses the UDP port number predefined for the Ethernet module system as the UDP port number of the destination If duplicate network and station numbers are set in the conversion table the data set with the younger registration number is used If all the required values are not set communication may not be performed successfully b Conversion processing of the table exchange system 1 When a communication request message command frame to access other station is received the same Network No and station number are searched in the conversion table of the Station No lt gt IP information and the communication request message is sent to the partner station with the corresponding IP address T
300. uest type Subrequest type Forced execution not performed Number of resend X19 Initial normal completion signal Read error code etc 4 WHEN THE Q LCPU ACCESSES THE PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER OF ANOTHER STATION USING THE DATA LINK INSTRUCTION MELSEC Q L 4 9 Error Codes for Data Link Instructions For the error codes that are returned when the execution results of data link instructions in this chapter end abnormally refer to the User s Manual Basic The error code for data link instruction is stored in the Ethernet module error log area and the following area 1 SEND RECV RECVS READ SREAD WRITE SWRITE REQ Control data completion status S1 1 2 ZNRD Buffer memory Address 207 3 ZNWR Buffer memory Address 209 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER MELSEC Q L 5 WHEN USING FILE TRANSFER FUNCTIONS FTP SERVER Files in the local station Q LCPU to which the Ethernet module is installed can be read and written from external device using the Ethernet module file transfer function In this chapter how to use command the Ethernet module FTP function from an external device personal computer workstations etc is explained The access destination of files handled using the file transfer function is the local station Q LCPU in the station to which the Ethernet module is connected Specify an access target CPU if the local station QCPU is included in a multiple CPU system
301. unications impossible at STOP time is selected and the remote STOP is executed from the external device Consequently the CPU module cannot reopen the communication line and the external device cannot execute the remote RUN Installation Precautions A CAUTION e Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the Safety Guidelines included with the MELSEC L series CPU module Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product e To interconnect modules engage the respective connectors and securely lock the module joint levers until they click Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module e Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing a module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction e Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions AX CAUTION e When connecting a cable with connector to the module connect the connector part to the module securely e Place the cables in a duct or clamp them If not dangling cable may swing or inadvertently be pulled resulting in damage to the module or cables or malfunction due to poor contact e Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module S
302. using dedicated instructions 2 Sending e mail using the Ethernet module s programmable controller CPU monitor function Executed by the Ethernet module according to the Ethernet module parameter setting news setting of a programming tool 2 1 1 E mail send and reception by the programmable controller CPU 1 Sending receiving e mail by the programmable controller CPU In sending receiving e mail by the programmable controller CPU the CPU information of a station in which an Ethernet module is installed is sent to another Ethernet modules or an external device such as a PC as the main text or attached file of e mail E mail sent from other Ethernet modules and PCs can also be received External device y Portable terminal Sending e mail by the programmable Ethernet module 4 i device that Remarks controller CPU MSEND instruction MRECV cannot handle instruction attached files Subject Binary format Attached file Binary to ASCII conversion Maximum 6k words Binary to CSV conversion Main text Designating using ASCII data Maximum 960 words O Can receive data A Some restrictions apply x Cannot receive data 1 The Ethernet module receives the Subject without decoding x2 The MRECV instruction is normally completed when a data size the size the MRECYV instruction receives after conversion is within 6144 words a Sending e mail by the programmable controller CPU MSEND i
303. value lt monitoring value signed _ When the monitoring device value is less than the value set When the monitoring device value is less than the value set by the user the user When the monitoring device value is equal to or greater than the value set by Device value gt monitoring value signed te use Device value gt monitoring value Device value gt monitoring value signed Device value gt monitoring value signed When the monitoring device value is greater than the value set by the user the monitoring device value is greater than the value set When the monitoring device value is greater than the value set by the user the user 2 USING THE E MAIL FUNCTION MELSEC Q L 9 Monitoring value Designate the comparison value of the condition of comparison given in 8 above 10 News data storage device The condition device that stores the news data is set when the news condition is satisfied When the CPU monitoring condition listed in 1 is No Setting a programming tool automatically sets the condition device therefore the user does not need to set it 11 News data points Designate how many devices should be read number of points read from the devices designated in 10 above a The number of device points that can be sent at a time is calculated as follows Word device points x 2 bit device points 8 round up lt 1920 1 Designate the settings so that the total number of points satisfie
304. word FTP server host name is displayed while connected to the server open HOST NAME username password open IP ADDRESS username password Host name Host name domain name or synonym of the host name IP address IP address of the Ethernet module User name FTP login name set during Ethernet module initial processing Password Password set during Ethernet module initial processing See Section 5 3 for the FTP login name and password To connect to the FTP server by designating the host name open HOST To connect to the FTP server by designating the IP address open 192 0 1 254 To connect to the FTP server by designating the host name and user name open HOST QJ71E71 To connect to the FTP server by designating the host name user name and password open HOST QJ71E71 QJ71E71 Normally the connection can be established by designating the FTP server IP address during FTP startup When designating the domain name the DNS environment must be set using the network parameters on the FTP client side The password entered from the keyboard is not displayed on the screen Writes a file to a CPU module put TRANSFER SOURCE FILE PATH transfer destination file path name To write the file MAINSEQ1 QPG to the RAM area of memory card with same file name put MAINSEQ1 QPG 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG To write the file MAINSEQ QPG file to the RAM area of memory card with different file name put MAINSEQ OPG 1 MAINSEQ1 QPG
305. writes data in the device designated in S2 and succeeding devices of the local station to the word devices of the station which is connected to other networks or Ethernet that has been specified with the target station network number and target station number in the control data When writing device data from other stations number is completed the completion device designated in D2 turns on Also when writing the device data designated in S2 is completed the device on other stations designated in D3 turns on Response station Programmable Ethernet module controller CPU Ethernet module S2 Channel 1 D1 SWRITE gt Channel n Channel 8 Ethernet Device data can be written to stations connected to other networks or Ethernet having the specified numbers in addition to stations connected to the local station s network The data link instruction and instructions for the Ethernet network system cannot be executed at two or more locations for the same channel If the execution conditions are met at two or more locations at the same time instructions to be executed later have to wait until the channel becomes available because handshaking is automatically performed at the execution of the first instruction 4 Whether the SWRITE instruction is being executed or has been completed normally or abnormally can be checked with the send r
306. writing ZNRD Reads from other station s device 1 3 Section 6 13 ZNWR Writes to other station s device 1 3 an 6 14 SEND ISends data to other station 1 data to other station ISends data to other station Section 6 9 6 9 For message any Reads receive data from other station y RECV 1 Section 6 6 data sending For the main program receiving Reads receive data from other station i RECVS 1 Section 6 6 For interrupt programs For reading writing Issues a remote RUN STOP request to other 1 Section 6 7 clock data REQ station Remote RUN STOP Reads writes clock data of other station Section 6 8 1 Cannot be used if the source or target station is a safety CPU 2 Writing to a safety CPU is not allowed from other stations x3 When the target station is an A2UCPU S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU or A2USCPU S1 use a CPU module with the following version or later e A2UCPU S1 ASUCPU A4UCPU Version AY manufactured in July 1995 or later e A2ASCPU S1 A2USCPU S1 Version CP manufactured in July 1995 or later 6 DEDICATED INSTRUCTIONS MELSEC Q L 1 The user should not change data control data request data etc designated with any of the dedicated instructions until the execution of that instruction is completed Only programmable controller CPUs of Q LCPU modules can handle the higher two digits of the year Gregorian calendar in the clock data that are processed with dedicated instruction
307. written in the programmable controller CPUs of the applicable stations where Ethernet modules are installed 3 COMMUNICATIONS VIA OTHER NETWORKS MELSEC Q L 3 3 2 Convert format between the Network No station number and IP address port number The process overview of the conversion method set by the Station No lt gt IP information screen for performing the other station access via Ethernet module using the CC Link IE Controller Network CC Link IE Field Network MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 relay communication function is explained Select one of the conversion methods to set 1 Automatic response system Convert format of Ethernet module default value a Overview of automatic response system 1 The automatic response system differs from the other convert format in that designations can only be made when the Ethernet module installed station is the communication request destination station or communication relay receiving station 2 The partner station IP Address or port number setting are not necessary with this conversion method therefore relay communications via other networks can be performed easily Communication request source station Communication relay e Communication relay receiving station sending station Ethernet Communication request destination station b Convert format of Automatic response system 1 When the Ethernet module receives other station access communication request m

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

USER MANUAL INSTRUCTIONS  R50A-3 と PBA50F-3R3の仕様比較  Berliner Forum Gewaltprävention  Scarica il manuale istruzioni  Little GIANT 599117 Instructions / Assembly    File  Samsung SCX-4100 用户手册  English p. 2 Français p. 6 Español p. 10  StarTech.com 304.8m Cat5e UTP  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file